NEC Server 140He User Manual
Express5800 140He  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
000  
Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer  
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the  
valuable property of NEC Computers International and/or its licensors. NEC Computers  
International and/or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other  
proprietary rights to this document, including all design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and  
sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others.  
The NEC Computers International product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in  
accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However,  
actual performance of each product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration,  
customer data, and operator control. Since implementation by customers of each product may  
vary, the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by  
the customer and is not warranted by NEC Computers International.  
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject  
to change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof with-  
out prior written approval of NEC Computers International is prohibited.  
Trademarks  
NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation.  
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. of the United States.  
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
ROM-DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and  
other countries.  
Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of United States.  
SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of the United States.  
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.  
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective trademark owners.  
rev 0.0 September 2005  
Copyright 2005  
NEC Computers International B.V.  
Nieuweweg 279  
6603 BN Wijchen  
The Netherlands  
All Rights Reserved  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep this User’s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS  
Follow the instructions in this User’s Guide for your safety to use the server.  
The server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings, and preventive  
actions against such hazards.  
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as  
described in this User’s Guide.  
In the User’s Guide or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger. These terms  
are defined as follows:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury.  
WARNING  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury, including  
burns, or property damage.  
CAUTION  
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The individual symbols  
are defined as follows:  
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard.  
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)  
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited  
action. (Prohibited Action)  
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a mandatory action to  
avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)  
(Example)  
Symbol to draw attention  
Term indicating a degree of danger  
CAUTION  
High temperature.  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are  
very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before  
installing/removing any component.  
Symbol indicating a prohibited  
action (may not always be  
indicated)  
Description of the danger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS  
Attentions  
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.  
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.  
Indicates that improper use may cause the clip of a hand.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.  
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.  
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.  
Prohibited Actions  
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.  
Mandatory Action  
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.  
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to follow the  
instruction.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS BY COLOUR OF THE PARTS  
Only green area is available for hot swap or hot plug operation. To avoid electric shock, disconnect all AC power cords  
before accessing to other parts especially blue area inside the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when  
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
CE Statement  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case  
the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).  
This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. This  
label is located on the internal CD-ROM installed in your system.  
CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Momentary voltage drop prevention:  
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop,  
an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.  
Notes:  
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation.  
(2) The contents of this User's Guide may be revised without prior notice.  
(3) The contents of this User’s Guide shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission of NEC  
Corporation.  
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this User’s Guide. If you notice any part  
unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this User’s Guide, contact the service representative where you purchased this  
product.  
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or consequential  
damages arising from the use of this User’s Guide regardless of Item (4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
PREFACE  
Welcome to the Express5800/140He server.  
The Express5800 server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to implement a computer for  
the next generation. With its potential capabilities, the server may be used as the workstation PC that configures a  
client-server system and provides high-speed processing and superior reliability.  
Read this User’s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the server and appreciate its functions to the  
maximum extent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ii  
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE  
This User’s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server.  
This User’s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup  
or operation of the server. Keep this manual for future use.  
The following describes how to proceed with this User’s Guide.  
How to Use This User's Guide  
To aid you in finding information quickly, this User’s Guide contains the following information:  
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server  
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter before setting up and  
using the server.  
Chapter 2 General Description  
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its components, handling of  
the floppy disk and CD-ROM drives. It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and  
disposal of the server.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server  
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections, and power on your system.  
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server  
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility and the  
MegaRAID Configuration Utility, which is used to configure SCSI devices in your system. This chapter also  
provides information on I/O board jumper settings.  
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
describes how to install the operating system.  
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities  
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using the attached "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM.  
Chapter 7 Maintenance  
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server. This chapter also  
includes a description on relocating and storing the server.  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.  
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server  
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional memory, optional  
add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.  
Appendix A Specification  
provides specifications for your server.  
Appendix B Other Precautions  
provides supplementary notes on using the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
iii  
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address  
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.  
Appendix D Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions  
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup. Using  
the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions. See Chapter 5 for  
details.  
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003  
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup. Using the Express  
Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table  
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.  
Text Conventions  
The following conventions are used throughout this User’s Guide. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS"  
provided earlier.  
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
Notes give important information about the material being described.  
NOTE:  
IN THE PACKAGE  
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make sure that you have  
everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any component missing or damaged, contact  
your service representative.  
„ Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need them to install  
optional devices or troubleshoot the server, as well as to set it up.  
„ Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the master disk in a  
designated place, and use its copy.  
„ Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system environment. If you find  
anything unclear, immediately ask your service representative for help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
iv  
CONTENTS  
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................................... i  
About This User's Guide............................................................................................................................................... ii  
In the Package..............................................................................................................................................................iii  
Chapter 1 ...........................................................................................................................1-1  
Notes on Using Your Server ............................................................................................1-1  
Warning Labels..........................................................................................................................................................1-2  
Safety Notes...............................................................................................................................................................1-3  
General ..................................................................................................................................................................1-3  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use.......................................................................................................................1-4  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection.................................................................................................1-5  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices........................................................................................................1-6  
During Operation...................................................................................................................................................1-7  
For Proper Operation .................................................................................................................................................1-8  
Transfer to Third Party...............................................................................................................................................1-9  
Consumables............................................................................................................................................................1-10  
Disposal of the Server..............................................................................................................................................1-10  
User Support ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-11  
Chapter 2 ...........................................................................................................................2-1  
General Description..........................................................................................................2-1  
Overview....................................................................................................................................................................2-2  
External View ........................................................................................................................................................2-3  
Front View (with the Front Door Open) ................................................................................................................2-4  
Front View (Switch and LED Panel).....................................................................................................................2-5  
Rear View..............................................................................................................................................................2-6  
Internal View .........................................................................................................................................................2-8  
I/O Board...............................................................................................................................................................2-9  
Processor Board...................................................................................................................................................2-10  
Memory Board..................................................................................................................................................... 2-11  
Management LAN Board .................................................................................................................................... 2-11  
Standard Features.....................................................................................................................................................2-12  
Power Supplies....................................................................................................................................................2-13  
Peripheral Bays....................................................................................................................................................2-13  
Recovering BIOS Data........................................................................................................................................2-15  
SAF-TE Logic .....................................................................................................................................................2-15  
System Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................2-15  
System Board Features........................................................................................................................................2-16  
Security................................................................................................................................................................2-18  
EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................................................2-19  
ESMPRO.............................................................................................................................................................2-20  
Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................................................................2-20  
System Diagnostic Utility....................................................................................................................................2-20  
DianaScope..........................................................................................................................................................2-20  
Using Your Server....................................................................................................................................................2-21  
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover)............................................................................................................2-21  
POWER Switch...................................................................................................................................................2-22  
POST ...................................................................................................................................................................2-22  
SLEEP Switch .....................................................................................................................................................2-26  
Floppy Disk Drive...............................................................................................................................................2-27  
CD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................................................................2-28  
Chapter 3 ...........................................................................................................................3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Setting Up Your Server .................................................................................................... 3-1  
Setup Flow................................................................................................................................................................. 3-2  
Selecting a Site .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3  
Unpacking the System............................................................................................................................................... 3-5  
Connecting Peripheral Devices.................................................................................................................................. 3-6  
Connecting Power Cord............................................................................................................................................. 3-8  
Turning On the Server ............................................................................................................................................. 3-10  
Installing Operating System .................................................................................................................................... 3-12  
Installing Utilities .................................................................................................................................................... 3-12  
Making Backup Copies of System Information....................................................................................................... 3-12  
Chapter 4........................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Configuring Your Server.................................................................................................. 4-1  
System BIOS ~ SETUP ~.......................................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Starting SETUP Utility.......................................................................................................................................... 4-2  
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage................................................................................................... 4-3  
Configuration Examples........................................................................................................................................ 4-4  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ........................................................................................................................ 4-7  
Disk Array Configuration – MegaRAID Configuration Utility –......................................................................... 4-29  
Notes on Using.................................................................................................................................................... 4-29  
Starting Configuration Utility.............................................................................................................................. 4-30  
Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-31  
Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility.................................................................................................. 4-34  
Remote Management Function................................................................................................................................ 4-49  
Default Network Settings.................................................................................................................................... 4-49  
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-49  
Configuring Management PC.............................................................................................................................. 4-50  
Using Remote Management Console.................................................................................................................. 4-51  
Configuring I/O Board Jumpers .............................................................................................................................. 4-77  
Chapter 5........................................................................................................................... 5-1  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup ................................................... 5-1  
About Express Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 5-2  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 ........................................................................................................................ 5-3  
Installation Notice ................................................................................................................................................. 5-3  
Setup Flow ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-6  
Installing Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................................................................... 5-7  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.................................................................................................................. 5-10  
Setting for Solving Problems .............................................................................................................................. 5-15  
Installing Maintenance Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 5-18  
Updating the System ........................................................................................................................................... 5-18  
Making Backup Copies of System Information .................................................................................................. 5-18  
Exceptional Setup................................................................................................................................................ 5-19  
Chapter 6........................................................................................................................... 6-1  
Installing and Using Utilities ........................................................................................... 6-1  
EXPRESSBUILDER................................................................................................................................................. 6-2  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console................................................................................... 6-4  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console ................................................................................ 6-8  
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu).................................................................... 6-10  
Configuration Diskette Creator................................................................................................................................ 6-11  
ESMPRO................................................................................................................................................................. 6-15  
Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................ 6-15  
DianaScope.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Power Console Plus .................................................................................................................................................6-17  
Major Functions...................................................................................................................................................6-17  
Components.........................................................................................................................................................6-17  
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................6-18  
Management PC Setup ........................................................................................................................................6-19  
BMC Online Update ................................................................................................................................................6-20  
Hardware Requirement........................................................................................................................................6-20  
Installation...........................................................................................................................................................6-20  
Startup .................................................................................................................................................................6-22  
Uninstallation ......................................................................................................................................................6-24  
Error Messages....................................................................................................................................................6-26  
Chapter 7 ...........................................................................................................................7-1  
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................7-1  
Making Backup Copies..............................................................................................................................................7-1  
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array configuration. When your  
hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data.  
To make a backup copy of the configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory  
on the optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.........................................7-1  
Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................................................7-1  
Cleaning the Server ...............................................................................................................................................7-2  
Cleaning the Interior..............................................................................................................................................7-2  
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse........................................................................................................................7-3  
Cleaning CD-ROM................................................................................................................................................7-4  
System Diagnostics....................................................................................................................................................7-5  
Test Items...............................................................................................................................................................7-5  
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics.........................................................................................................7-5  
Relocating/Storing the Server ....................................................................................................................................7-8  
Chapter 8 ...........................................................................................................................8-1  
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................8-1  
System Viewers..........................................................................................................................................................8-2  
Lamps ........................................................................................................................................................................8-3  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp..........................................................................................................................................8-3  
STATUS Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................8-3  
DISK ACCESS Lamp............................................................................................................................................8-5  
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp ...............................................................................................................................8-5  
UID Lamp..............................................................................................................................................................8-5  
Attention Lamp......................................................................................................................................................8-6  
Processor Board Error Lamp .................................................................................................................................8-6  
Memory Board Error Lamp...................................................................................................................................8-7  
I/O Board Error Lamp ...........................................................................................................................................8-8  
Power Unit Error Lamp.........................................................................................................................................8-9  
Fan Error Lamp ...................................................................................................................................................8-10  
Thermal Error Lamp............................................................................................................................................8-10  
Access Lamps......................................................................................................................................................8-10  
Memory Board Lamps......................................................................................................................................... 8-11  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp).................................................................................................................8-12  
LAN Connector Lamps .......................................................................................................................................8-13  
PCI Slot Lamps....................................................................................................................................................8-14  
FAN Fault Lamps ................................................................................................................................................8-15  
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................................8-16  
Error Messages after Power-on ...........................................................................................................................8-16  
POST Error Messages .........................................................................................................................................8-17  
Beep Codes..........................................................................................................................................................8-23  
Error Messages on Virtual LCD ..........................................................................................................................8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Solving Problems..................................................................................................................................................... 8-29  
Problems with Server .......................................................................................................................................... 8-29  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ............................................................................................ 8-35  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000.................................................................................. 8-36  
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER .................................................................................................................. 8-40  
Problems with Express Setup.............................................................................................................................. 8-41  
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration ................................................................................................ 8-44  
Problems with Master Control Menu .................................................................................................................. 8-45  
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ................................................................................................... 8-45  
Collecting Event Log............................................................................................................................................... 8-46  
Collect Configuration Information .......................................................................................................................... 8-47  
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information........................................................................................................ 8-48  
Memory Dump ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-48  
Preparing for Memory Dumping......................................................................................................................... 8-48  
Saving the Dump File.......................................................................................................................................... 8-49  
Recovery for Windows 2000 System....................................................................................................................... 8-50  
Off-Line Maintenance Utility .................................................................................................................................. 8-52  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility............................................................................................................ 8-52  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility ............................................................................................................ 8-53  
Resetting the Server................................................................................................................................................. 8-54  
Forced Shutdown..................................................................................................................................................... 8-54  
Chapter 9........................................................................................................................... 9-1  
Upgrading Your Server .................................................................................................... 9-1  
Safety Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 9-2  
Anti-static Measures.................................................................................................................................................. 9-3  
Preparing for Installation and Removal..................................................................................................................... 9-4  
Device Installation or Removal Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-5  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive...................................................................................................................................... 9-5  
Power Supply Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 9-10  
5.25-inch Device ................................................................................................................................................. 9-14  
Rear Access Cover .............................................................................................................................................. 9-17  
PCI Access Cover................................................................................................................................................ 9-19  
PCI Board............................................................................................................................................................ 9-20  
Memory Board .................................................................................................................................................... 9-42  
DIMM ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-45  
Processor Board .................................................................................................................................................. 9-55  
Processor ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-58  
Appendix A........................................................................................................................A-1  
Specifications ...................................................................................................................A-1  
Appendix B........................................................................................................................B-1  
Other Precautions ............................................................................................................B-1  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ....................................................................................................B-1  
Server Management Software ...............................................................................................................................B-1  
Floppy Disk...........................................................................................................................................................B-1  
CD-ROM...............................................................................................................................................................B-3  
Tape Media............................................................................................................................................................B-3  
Keyboard...............................................................................................................................................................B-4  
Mouse....................................................................................................................................................................B-5  
Appendix C........................................................................................................................C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
IRQ and I/O Port Address................................................................................................ C-1  
Appendix D....................................................................................................................... D-1  
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions........................................................... D-1  
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.............................................................................................. D-1  
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ................................................................................. D-1  
Updating System .................................................................................................................................................. D-1  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ..................................................... D-1  
MO Device ........................................................................................................................................................... D-1  
Media such as DAT .............................................................................................................................................. D-2  
Partition Size ........................................................................................................................................................ D-2  
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions...................................................................................................... D-3  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"............................... D-3  
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation .................................................................................... D-5  
Updating the System............................................................................................................................................. D-6  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings................................................................................................................ D-7  
PROSet................................................................................................................................................................. D-7  
Network Driver..................................................................................................................................................... D-8  
Optional Network Board Driver........................................................................................................................... D-8  
Graphics Accelerator Driver................................................................................................................................. D-9  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29320 / SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b) ................................................ D-9  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321).................................................................................... D-9  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ................................................................................. D-9  
Appendix E ........................................................................................................................E-1  
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 ..................................................................................E-1  
Before Installing Windows Server™ 2003 ................................................................................................................E-1  
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ..................................................................................E-1  
Updating System ...................................................................................................................................................E-1  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ......................................................E-1  
MO Device ............................................................................................................................................................E-1  
Media such as DAT ...............................................................................................................................................E-2  
Partition Size .........................................................................................................................................................E-2  
Installing Windows Server 2003................................................................................................................................E-3  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"....................................................E-3  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ..............................................................................................................E-5  
Updating the System..............................................................................................................................................E-6  
Upgrade Installation ..............................................................................................................................................E-7  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings.................................................................................................................E-9  
PROSet..................................................................................................................................................................E-9  
Network Driver....................................................................................................................................................E-10  
Re-install the Network Driver .............................................................................................................................E-10  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)..........................................................................E-11  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b)...........................................................................E-11  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)...................................................................................E-11  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ................................................................................E-11  
Appendix F ........................................................................................................................E-1  
Product Configuration Record Table..............................................................................E-1  
Hardware ...............................................................................................................................................................E-1  
Software.................................................................................................................................................................E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Notes on Using Your Server  
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1-2  
WARNING LABELS  
A warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to inform the user that a  
hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not intentionally remove or damage any of these labels.)  
If you find any label totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
SAFETY NOTES  
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the  
server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.  
General  
WARNING  
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly affect human lives.  
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human  
lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and devices, aeronautics and space devices,  
transportation facilities and devices; and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. We  
assume no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the  
server has been used in the above conditions.  
Do not use the server if any smoke, odour, or noise is present.  
If smoke, odour, or noise is present, immediately turn off the POWER switch and disconnect the  
power plug from the outlet, then contact your service representative. Using the server in such  
conditions may cause a fire.  
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.  
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or openings in the  
floppy disk or CD-ROM drive. Doing so may cause an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.  
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper clips) enter the  
server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock, a fire, or a failure of the  
server. When such things accidentally enter the server, immediately turn off the power and  
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service  
representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use  
WARNING  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to follow this warning may  
cause an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Plug in to a proper power source.  
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak.  
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a power cord that does not  
meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and cause a fire.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.  
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may cause a fire.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect contact) may cause a fire.  
Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug,  
increasing the possibility of fire.  
Use an authorized power cord only.  
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized power cord may  
cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.  
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord.  
Do not stretch the cord harness.  
Do not pinch the power cord.  
Do not bend the power cord.  
Keep chemicals away from the power cord.  
Do not twist the power cord.  
Do not place any object on the power cord.  
Do not bundle power cords.  
Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.  
Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.  
Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord with a new one of the  
same specifications. Ask your service representative for replacement.)  
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.  
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and  
to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do not use the attached power cord for  
any other purpose. Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection  
CAUTION  
Never attempt to lift the server only by three persons or less.  
Your server weighs 75 kg (depending on its hardware configuration). Carrying the server only by  
three persons or less may strain your back. Hold the server firmly by its bottom with four  
persons or more to carry it. Do not hold the front door to lift the server. The front door may be  
disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this manual.  
Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.  
a dusty place  
a humid place such as near a boiler  
a place exposed to direct sunlight  
an unstable place  
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source.  
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before  
installing/removing any optional internal device or connecting/disconnecting any interface cable  
to/from the server. If the server is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source,  
touching an internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted  
from a short circuit.  
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.  
Use only interface cables provided by us and locate a proper device and connector before  
connecting a cable. Using an authorised cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination  
may cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.  
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.  
Do not use any damaged cable connector.  
Do not step on the cable.  
Do not place any object on the cable.  
Do not use the server with loose cable connections.  
Do not use the equipment in the place where corrosive gases exist.  
Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide,  
hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, ozone, etc) exist.  
Also, do not set it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating  
corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium chloride) or conductive metals. There is a risk of a fire due to  
corrosion and shorts of an internal printed board.  
Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power supply.  
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the server shall not exceed  
the rating load of the power branch circuit. The server requires three or four Power Cords  
(depending on your configuration). Connect each power cord to each appropriate Wall Outlet  
provided with 20A branch circuit. Contact your electric constructor or the local power company  
for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described  
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as  
malfunctions of the server.  
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
A laser beam used in the CD-ROM drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look into or insert a  
mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam is caught in your eyes, you may  
lose your eyesight (the laser beam is invisible).  
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.  
Your server contains lithium and NiMH batteries. Do not remove the battery. Danger of  
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the battery close to a fire or in the water  
may cause an explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to dead lithium and/or NiMH batteries,  
contact your service representative to replace it only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by  
yourself.  
Disconnect all the power plugs before accessing inside the server, or connecting the  
peripherals.  
The server has two power cords.  
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect all power plugs from the power outlets before  
cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices. Touching any internal device of the  
server with its power cords connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of  
the server is off-powered.  
Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth.  
Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug, which may cause a fire.  
CAUTION  
High temperature  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are very  
hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing/removing any  
component.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a contact failure,  
resulting in smoke or fire.  
Protect the unused connectors with a protective cap.  
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with a protective cap to prevent short  
circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power supply cable connector from the  
internal devices, attach a protective cap to the connector. Failure to follow this warning may  
cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Do not touch any electrical component inside the server during the hot-swap replacement.  
All power flows inside the server during the hot-swap of replaceable components (PCI add-in  
cards, hard disk, cooling fan, and power supply). Do not touch the electrical components inside  
the server to avoid an electric shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
During Operation  
CAUTION  
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.  
Disconnect all power plugs from the outlets when a thunderstorm is approaching. If it starts  
thundering before you disconnect the all power plugs, do not touch any part of the server  
including the cables. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Keep animals away from the server.  
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Do not place any object on top of the server.  
An object placed on top of the server may fall down, resulting in damage to your property  
around the server.  
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.  
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server.  
Do not remove the cooling fans.  
Only an authorized service technician can remove the cooling fans from the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
FOR PROPER OPERATION  
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring these notes will cause  
malfunctions or failures of the server.  
„ Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details, see Chapter 3,  
"Setting Up Your Server."  
„ Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server although it may  
appear on the operating system.  
„ Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and  
peripheral devices.  
„ Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk.  
„ The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage changes. When  
plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the  
POWER switch on the front panel. This is normal system operation and is required by the server management  
logic.  
„ When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back on.  
„ Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen.  
„ Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.  
„ Some software includes a command to eject the CD-ROM tray. Make sure that the front door is opened before  
running the command. Running this command with the front door closed may cause the CD-ROM tray or the  
media to hit against the front door, resulting in a failure of the server.  
„ Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning proactively prevents  
various failures of the server.  
„ Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is recommended to use an  
uninterruptible power supply unit.  
„ Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable.  
– After transport of the server  
– After storage of the server  
– After the server is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring the server  
operation (temperature: 10°C to 35°C, humidity: 20% to 80%)  
„ Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is installed in a system  
requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server (NTP server).  
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment, contact  
your service representative to ask for maintenance.  
„ Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: -10°C to 55°C, humidity: 20% to 80%, without  
condensation) to allow built-in devices and the unit to operate correctly in the next operation.  
„ Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices may be physically  
installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as malfunctions of the server.  
„ We recommend you use our genuine products. Some third-party products claim that they support the server.  
However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulting from use of such third-party products will  
be charged.  
„ Playback of disks that do not conform to CD-ROM standards with the CD-ROM drive is not guaranteed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY  
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the server to a third  
party:  
Express server  
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.  
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk  
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g., customers'  
information or companies' management information) on the removed hard disk to any third  
parties.  
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or execute the  
"format" command of the operating system. However, the actual data remains written on  
the hard disk. Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for  
unexpected purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available at stores) for data  
erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble explained above. For details on data  
erasure, ask your sales representative.  
Provided software  
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following requirements must  
be satisfied:  
„ All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained.  
„ Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each software application must  
be satisfied.  
„ Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
CONSUMABLES  
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement, such as  
batteries, fans, the internal CD-ROM drive, the floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For stable operation of the server, we  
recommend you replace these components on a regular basis. Contact your service representative for replacement or the  
product.  
DISPOSAL OF THE SERVER  
Dispose of the server, all the internal devices, floppy disks, and CD-ROMs according to all national laws and  
regulations. Also dispose of the power cord provided with the server to avoid diversion to some other devices.  
IMPORTANT: For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the IO board of the server,  
contact your service representative.  
NOTE: If the real-time clock battery on the I/O board reaches its life, the following  
message appears on the display while running the POST. Contact your service  
representative to replace the battery.  
0250 System battery is dead –Replace and run SETUP  
WARNING  
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.  
Your server contains lithium or NiMH batteries. Do not remove any battery. Danger of explosion  
if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the lithium or NiMH battery close to a fire or in the  
water may cause an explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the failure of lithium and/or NiMH  
batteries, contact your service representative to replace it only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by  
yourself.  
NiMH battery  
Lithium battery  
IO board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
USER SUPPORT  
When the server needs after-sales service, check if the warranty is still valid, and determine which service is necessary  
as indicated on the "Certificate".  
Before asking for repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:  
1. Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.  
2. See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the recommended measure for it.  
3. Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.  
4. Check the server using a computer virus detection program. Computer virus detection programs are available  
for purchase in stores.  
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, contact your service representative immediately.  
Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on the display unit before, it may provide a  
significant help to your service representative.  
When Having Your Server Repaired  
Prepare the following when having your server repaired:  
„ Certificate  
„ Notes of the messages displayed on the display unit  
„ Error information*  
„ Records of the Express server and peripheral equipment  
* Error information includes the Error Message shown in Chapter 8.  
Prepare the error information only when required by your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
Setting Up a Healthy Work Environment  
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become tired, which may  
cause disorders of your body. When you use a computer, observe the following to keep  
yourself from getting tired:  
Good Working Posture  
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer:  
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.  
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard.  
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.  
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part of your body is  
under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are most relaxed.  
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display  
unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working posture may cause eye strain or poor  
eyesight.  
Display Unit Angles Adjustment  
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles. This  
adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the  
display contents easy to see. You will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you  
will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal  
and vertical angles.  
Screen Brightness and Contrast Adjustment  
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The most suitable  
brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment (well-lighted  
room or insufficient light). Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to  
see. An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.  
Keyboard slope Adjustment  
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for slope adjustment. Adjust the  
keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in  
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.  
Equipment Cleaning  
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen.  
Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.  
Fatigue and Rest  
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
General Description  
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It includes names and  
functions of the components and features of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-2  
OVERVIEW  
Your server is a highly reliable, high-powered, fault-tolerant, high-capacity, multiprocessing server based on the 64-bit  
Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP. It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of computing  
performance, memory capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server market  
applications. These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic  
connectivity capability such as file and print services, e-mail, web access, web site server, etc.  
Your server includes a 3.5-inch diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, a 3.5-inch hard disk bay, and removable media device  
bay. In the basic configuration, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to five 1.0-inch height SCSI hard disk drives that  
can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down, if RAID functionality is configured in the system. If  
the additional hard disk drive cage is installed in your server, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to thirteen 1.0-inch  
height SCSI hard disk drives.  
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional processor, additional memory,  
add-in boards and peripheral devices: tape devices, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
External View  
1
3
4
2
1
Front door  
Open the front door when you access to the POWER switch, the 5.25-inch device, the CD-ROM drive, or the  
optional USB floppy disk drive or install or remove a hard disk drive, processor, memory board, and/or the DIMM.  
2
3
4
Key slot  
Insert the security key to lock or unlock the front door.  
Rear access cover  
Open the rear access cover to install or remove the PCI boards and fans.  
Stabilizer (2 each side at front and rear)  
Remove the stabilizers when converting the server to rack-mounting model.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4  
Front View (with the Front Door Open)  
See "Lamps" described later.  
2
3
5
1
8
7-3  
1-1  
2-1  
7-4  
4
2-2  
1-2  
3-0  
2-3  
4
7-2  
1-3  
6-5  
3-1  
6-4  
6-3  
6-2  
3-2  
6-1  
3-3 3-4 5-1  
4
6
1
3.5-inch floppy disk drive  
Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write data to the disk.  
1-1: Eject button 1-2: Disk slot  
1-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lits green when accessing)  
CD-ROM drive  
The CD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM.  
2-1: Emergency eject hole - 2-2: CD Tray eject button - 2-3: Access lamp lits orange when accessing)  
3.5-inch disk bay  
2
3
The 3.5-inch hard disk bay contains additional hard disk slots. Hard disk drives having the thickness of 1 inch can  
be inserted into the slots. The number following the bold-faced character indicates the SCSI ID.  
DISK lamp  
4
5
Processor board  
5-1: Processor board ejector  
6
7
8
9
Memory board  
6-1: Memory board ejector - 6-2: Memory board power lamp - 6-3: Memory board attention lamp  
6-4: Memory board redundancy lamp - 6-5: Memory board attention switch  
Additional memory board slot  
The number following the bold-faced character indicates the slot number.  
Additional memory board shall be installed in the slot #2, #3, and then #4 in this order.  
5.25-inch device bay  
DAT (digital audio tape) drive or optical disk drive may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bays. Slot #1 (right)  
and slot #2 (left).  
Additional 3.5-inch disk bay  
Install the optional HotSwap HDD cage 3-drive SCSI Media Bay in this bay. With the cage, up to thirteen hard  
disk drives can be connected to the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
Front View (Switch and LED Panel)  
1
2
3
4
5 to 10 from left  
18  
11 to 17 from left  
19  
1
POWER switch  
The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the POWER/SLEEP lamp  
goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the power is turned off. The system is forcibly  
shut down when the power switch is pressed continuously for four seconds or longer.  
2
3
RESET switch  
The reset switch is used to reset the server.  
SLEEP switch  
If you press the sleep switch once, the server enters into the sleep state (power saving mode). If you press the  
switch again, the server recovers to the normal state. Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 support this feature.  
4
UID (Unit ID) switch  
Pressing the UID switch turns UID lamp (blue) located on the front panel and the rear panel on and off.  
5
6
7
8
9
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
STATUS lamp  
DISK ACCESS lamp  
LAN1 access lamp  
LAN2 access lamp  
10 UID (Unit ID lamp)  
11 DUMP lamp  
12 Processor board error lamp  
13 Memory board error lamp  
14 I/O board error lamp  
15 Power unit error lamp  
16 Fan error lamp  
17 Thermal error lamp  
18 DUMP switch  
The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.  
19 CLEAR switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
Rear View  
1-4 1-3  
1-2  
1-1  
2
8
7
10  
9
11  
12  
14  
13-2  
13-1  
15  
17  
16-2  
18  
3-4  
17  
3-3  
16-1  
21  
19  
3-2  
18  
20  
3-1  
6
5
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
1
2
3
Power supply unit  
The power supply unit supplies DC powers to the server. The factory-installed power supply units are installed in  
slots 1 and 2 and slots 3 and 4 are for optional power supply units for power redundant configuration.  
AC inlet  
The AC inlet is connected with the power cord. Each power supply unit has one socket. Use the provided power  
cord.  
Additional PCI board slot  
3-1: 64bit/100MHz, hot-plug PCI-X  
3-2: Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)  
3-3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)  
3-4: 32-bit/33MHz, non-hot-plug PCI  
PCI slot Fault lamp  
PCI slot POWER lamp  
PCI slot error lamp  
Mouse connector  
4
5
6
7
Used to connect the optional mouse.  
Keyboard connector  
Used to connect the optional keyboard.  
Printer port connector  
8
9
Used to connect a printer with Centronics interface.  
10 Serial port A connector  
Serial port A connector is used to connect the server to a device with serial interface. The server cannot be  
directly connected to a leased line through this connector.  
11 Serial port B connector  
To be used exclusively with the serial port B connector on the front panel.  
12 Management LAN Port  
13 ICMB connector  
Used to connect a device having ICMB interface. The number following the bold-faced character shows the port  
number.  
14 Monitor connector  
Used to connect the display unit.  
15 USB connector  
Used to connect a device with USB interface.  
16 LAN connector  
Used to connect a network system on LAN.  
The number following the bold-faced character shows the port number.  
17 LINK/ACT lamp  
18 1000/100/10 lamp  
19 BMC error lamp  
20 Processor board error lamp  
21 I/O board error lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8  
Internal View  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Power supply cage  
Non-hot-plug PCI slot  
Hot-plug PCI slot  
Fan bay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
I/O Board  
9-6 9-3  
17  
16  
15  
14 13 12  
1
11-6  
11-3  
11-2  
9-2  
9-5  
11-5  
11-4  
11-1  
2
3
4
5
7
8
9-1  
10  
6
9-4  
1
2
3
Connectors for external devices  
PCI slot error lamp (corresponds to PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)  
PCI slot power lamp (upper) / PCI slot Fault lamp (lower)  
(corresponds to PCI slots #4 to #9 from top)  
4
PCI board slot (PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)  
Slots 1, 2: Non-hot-plug PCI, 5V, 33MHz  
Slot 3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)  
IPMB connector  
BMC configuration jumper block  
Jumper switch for CMOS/Password clear  
Management LAN board connector  
Fan connector  
Slots 4 and 5: (Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)  
Slots 6 to 9: Hot-plug PCI-X, 3.3V, 100MHz  
5
6
7
8
9
Number following the bold-faced number indicates port number.  
SCSI connector  
Ch-2, Ch-1, and HDD cage from left  
Fan error lamp  
10  
11  
Number following the bold-faced number indicates fan number.  
Power BP connector  
Lithium battery  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
DIMM connector for RAID  
NiMH battery module for RAID  
Battery module connector  
LAN controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
Processor Board  
1-1  
1-2  
1-4  
1-3  
2-1  
2-4  
3-1 3-2  
2-2  
3-4 3-3  
2-3  
1
2
3
VRM (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)  
Processor (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)  
Processor/VRM error lamp  
(Number following the bold-faced character indicates the lamp number.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
Memory Board  
6
5
7-4  
8
7-3  
7-2  
7-1  
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIMM slot error lamp (DIMM slot #1 to 4 from bottom)  
Memory board Eject switch  
Memory board Power lamp  
Memory board Attention lamp  
Memory board Redundancy lamp  
Memory board Attention switch  
DIMM slot (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)  
The factory-installed memory board contains at least 2 x 512MB DIMM in slots 1 and  
2.  
8
Switch to turn on DIMM slot error lamp  
Management LAN Board  
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
ICMB #1 connector  
ICMB #2 connector  
Management LAN Port  
I/O board connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
STANDARD FEATURES  
High performance  
Expandability  
„ 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP  
3.16GHz/1MB  
„ Wide variety of optional I/O slots  
Two 32-bit/33 MHz PCI slots  
3.66GHz/1MB  
3.33GHz/8MB (on specific configurations  
only)  
Four 64-bit/100 MHz PCI-X sots (support hot-plug)  
Two PCI EXPRESS(x8) slots (support hot-plug),  
One PCI EXPRESS(x4) slot.  
„ High-speed memory access  
(Supports DDRII 400-compliant  
interleaved memory)  
„ High-speed 1000BASE-T/  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface  
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps  
supported)  
„ Large memory of up to 32 GB  
„ 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay holds five hot-swap SCSI hard  
disk drives. If additional hard disk drive cage is installed,  
system can support up to 13 hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives.  
„ Remote power-on feature  
„ Up to four multi-processors are available for upgrade.  
„ USB interface  
„ High-speed disk access  
(Ultra320 SCSI x 2)  
Many Available Features  
„ Graphic accelerator "Radeon7000M" support  
„ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation mode) format support  
„ POWER switch mask  
„ Software power-off  
„ Remote power-on feature  
„ AC-LINK feature  
„ Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) feature  
„ Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)  
„ Remote console feature  
High-reliability  
Self-diagnosis  
„ Memory mirroring feature  
„ Online sparing memory feature  
„ Memory hot-swap feature  
„ MemoryRAID feature  
„ Memory monitoring feature (single-bit error  
correction/ double-bit error detection)  
„ Memory/processor degradation feature  
(logical isolation of a failed device)  
„ Bus parity error detection  
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)  
„ Test and Diagnosis (T&D)  
Maintenance Features  
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
„ Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch  
Power Saving Feature  
„ Sleep feature (available for Windows Server  
2003/Windows 2000)  
„ Thermal sensor  
Easy and Fine Setup  
„ Error notification  
„ Internal cooling fan monitoring feature  
„ Internal voltage monitoring feature  
„ BIOS password feature  
„ Security feature (security lock)  
„ Redundant power supply  
„ EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup utility)  
„ Express Setup  
„ Configuration Diskette Creator  
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)  
„ SCSI Configuration Utility (SCSI device utility)  
„ Disk array (onboard)  
„ Recovering BIOS Data  
Management Utilities  
„ ESMPRO  
„ DianaScope  
„ Advanced Remote Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
Power Supplies  
When the additional power supply units are installed and system operates with four power supply units, the server can  
continue its operation without interruption even if one of these power supply units fails (in the redundant configuration).  
If an additional power supply unit is installed while the system is operating with three power supply units, a log that  
represents "power recovery" is recorded in the system event log. This indicates that the power supply is in redundant  
configuration and maximum configuration.  
Peripheral Bays  
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis includes the following  
peripheral bays:  
„ Media bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (supports 720 KB and 1.44 MB floppy disk  
media) and the standard CD-ROM drive.  
„ A 5.25-inch device bay for installing up to two half-height 5.25-inch peripheral devices or a full-height  
5.25-inch peripheral device such as an optional tape drive.  
„ The SCSI hard disk drive bay for installing up to five SCSI hard disk drives. If you install the additional hard  
disk drive cage, you can install up to thirteen SCSI hard disk drives.  
„ The SCSI disk drives can be easily installed or removed. The drive carrier allows you to access to disk drives  
from the front of the system. If disk drives are provided with RAID configuration within the system, a disk  
drive can be swapped with another without power interruption in the system (hot-swap).  
NOTE: The SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot-swap back plane that requires an  
80-pin single connector attachment (SCA) connector on the drives that you install.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature  
Memory Mirroring Feature  
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board  
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this  
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations  
are:  
„ Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2  
„ Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4  
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacity.  
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.  
Memory board 1  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 2  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 3  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
–
Memory board 4  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
–
A
B
C
Memory RAID Feature  
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other  
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board  
must have DIMMs of same capacity.  
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.  
Memory board 1  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 2  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 3  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 4  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
A
B
C
Setting BIOS  
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:  
„ To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].  
„ To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].  
Others  
„ Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –  
capacity for standby memory  
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity  
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity  
„ Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.  
„ Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:  
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:  
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.  
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.  
c) If an ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event Viewer:  
Source name:  
Event ID:  
ESMCommonService  
2313  
Explanation:  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time: XX  
d) If report setting is made through the ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is  
performed. The report contents are as follows:  
Explanation:  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time:  
XX  
Recovering BIOS Data  
Two system BIOSes, primary and secondary, are used to realize the duplex configuration.  
Normally, the system operates with the primary BIOS. If a primary BIOS data error occurs or if the device containing  
the system BIOS fails, control is immediately transferred to the secondary BIOS. Thus, the activation of the system is  
ensured.  
At shipment, the latest version of system BIOS is stored both in the primary and the secondary BIOS. If you execute the  
system BIOS update, the secondary BIOS is updated, and the updated BIOS becomes the primary BIOS. Thereafter, the  
system is activated from that primary BIOS.  
SAF-TE Logic  
The SCSI backplane includes SAF-TE (SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure) logic that provides an interface to the  
disk subsystem that supports status signals, hot swapping drives, and enclosure monitoring.  
The transport mechanism for the standardized alert detection and status reporting is the SCSI bus. Disk drives, power  
supplies, cooling fans, and temperature are continually monitored and the conditions then reported over the SCSI bus to  
the system. When used with RAID management software the user can be alerted of impending or imminent disk  
conditions requiring attention. This allows the user to react to conditions that could normally go unnoticed until data  
loss.  
System Cooling  
The chassis includes a hot-swappable fan module with six fans for cooling the processor(s), hard drives, and PCI cards.  
The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air through the chassis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
System Board Features  
The following subsections describe the system board major components.  
Processor  
The processor board accommodates one to four 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ MP processors with 1 MB cache in an FC-PGA2  
package.  
DIMM Memory  
To install or replace a DIMM, remove the memory board first.  
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (32 GB maximum) can be installed in  
the server.  
Install the DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) into the DIMM socket on the memory board of the server. DIMMs are  
installed in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.  
The controller automatically detects, sizes, and initializes the memory array, depending on the type, size, and speed of  
the installed DIMMs, and reports memory size and allocation to the server via configuration registers.  
NOTE: Use DIMMs that have been provided by us. Contact your service representative or  
dealer for a current list of approved memory modules.  
Onboard Video  
The I/O board incorporates an ATI® Radeon® 7000M graphics accelerator with 16 MB of video SDRAM that supports  
all standard IBM VGA modes. The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports:  
„ Pixel resolutions up to 1024 × 768  
„ CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate  
The I/O board supports disabling of the onboard video through BIOS Setup or when a plug-in video card is installed in  
any of the PCI slots.  
On Board RAID Controller  
The I/O board includes an on-board RAID controller, which is composed of NQ80332 I/O processor and 53C1030 SCSI  
host adapter. The on-board RAID controller supports the following features:  
„ Dual-channel Ultra320 SCSI interface (CH0 and CH1)  
Connect the HDD cage to CH0, and HDD cage or tape device to CH1.  
„ RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and spanning of RAID1 and RAID5  
„ 256 MB of cache memory  
„ Battery-backup cache memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-17  
Network Interface Controllers  
NOTE: To ensure EMC product regulation compliance, the system must be used with  
shielded LAN cables.  
The I/O board includes Intel® 82546GB network interface controller (NIC). The Intel® 82546GB network interface  
controller supports the following features:  
„ Two channels of 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000BASE-T networks.  
„ Direct 64-bit, 133 MHz interface to the PCI-X bus  
„ 82546GB provides standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Interface for 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T  
(802.3, 802.3u, 802.3ab).  
System Board Management Controller (BMC)  
Server management is concentrated in the System Board Management Controller (BMC). The BMC and associated  
circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, which remains active when system power is switched off, but the  
AC power source is still on and connected.  
The BMC supports DianaScope, which allows remote server management through networks.  
See Chapter 6 or online document in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for DianaScope.  
One major function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system management events, and log their occurrence in the  
non-volatile System Event Log (SEL). The events being monitored include overheating and overvoltage conditions, fan  
failure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate monitoring, the BMC maintains the non-volatile Sensor Data Record  
(SDR), from which sensor information can be retrieved. The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDR sensor  
information, so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.  
The BMC performs the following:  
„ Monitors server board temperature and voltage  
„ Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)  
„ Detects and indicates fan failure  
„ Manages the SEL interface  
„ Manages the SDR Repository interface  
„ Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock  
„ Monitors the system management watchdog timer  
„ Monitors the periodic SMI timer  
„ Monitors the event receiver  
„ Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring, and front panel  
lock/unlock initiation  
„ Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.  
Degradation Feature  
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM, processor, or cooling fan to assure continuous operation  
of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis program after power on) detects such a DIMM,  
processor, or cooling fan.  
Failed DIMMs, processors, and cooling fans may be identified on the screen that the POST displays, or with the BIOS  
setup utility, "SETUP." They may also be identified on the system that has ESMPRO installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18  
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN/PME)  
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet from the management  
computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.  
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for "Wake On LAN/PME" in the Advanced Chipset Control of the  
Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch once to start the  
operating system, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.  
„ Abnormal previous system shut-down  
„ No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power blackout, etc.)  
NOTE: Wake On LAN feature is supported in 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T adapter on the  
I/O board.  
AC-LINK Feature  
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the server supports the  
power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server. AC-LINK feature can be  
enabled or disabled with "AC-LINK" in the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
Security  
To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a full lockable front door and Server  
Management software that monitors the system intrusion switches.  
Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring  
The front door of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front of the computer chassis.  
The server includes an intrusion switch for the rear access cover. When this cover is opened, the switch transmits an  
alarm signal to the system board, where server management software processes the signal.  
Software Locks via the System Setup Utility  
The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the  
system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct  
password(s). For example:  
„ Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and  
mouse after a specified time-out period – 2 to 120 minutes.  
„ Set and enable an administrative password.  
„ Set and enable a user password  
„ Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel reset, power and  
sleep switches.  
„ Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.  
„ Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-19  
EXPRESSBUILDER  
The CD-ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called " EXPRESSBUILDER." When you have first  
installed the server or append features to the server, use the EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server.  
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.  
The major functions of the EXPRESSBUILDER are:  
„ To install the Operating System.  
"Express Setup" helps you to install Windows system. (See Chapter 5)  
„ To diagnose the system.  
EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server. (See Chapter 6)  
„ To create a support disk.  
Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk, or the OEM floppy  
disk used for a manual installation of Windows. (See Chapter 6)  
„ To update the BIOS.  
Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server. (See Chapter 6)  
„ To update the Windows System*  
"Update Express5800 System" in Master Control Menu (Windows-based EXPRESSBUILDER feature)  
updates several resources of Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 or Microsoft® Windows® 2000. (See  
Chapter 6)  
„ To install the utilities.  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM includes some management software for Windows ( ESMPRO, DianaScope,  
etc.) and maintenance utilities for DOS (System diagnostics, Off-line Maintenance Utility, etc.).  
You can install the applications for Windows from Master Control Menu and install the utilities for DOS from  
Tools menu. (See Chapter 6)  
„ To read the online documents*  
You can refer to the online documents from Master Control Menu. (See Chapter 6)  
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer  
via cross cable, modem, or LAN (remote console). See Chapter 6 for details.  
* These functions are available under Windows system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20  
ESMPRO  
ESMPRO is a server management software application that runs on the operating system. ESMPRO includes  
ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and ESMPRO Agent for the server.  
NOTE: For details of major functions of ESMPRO, system configuration and setups with  
ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.  
Available functions of ESMPRO depend on the operating system you install. Ask your  
service representative for details.  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysis of the server. Normally this utility  
is used by the maintenance engineer.  
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.  
System Diagnostic Utility  
The system diagnostic utility contained in EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent hardware failures. See Chapter 7  
for details.  
DianaScope  
DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the Express5800 series.  
DianaScope can control the managed server even if operating system is not running on the managed server.  
See Chapter 6 and online documentation in the EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-21  
USING YOUR SERVER  
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as floppy disk drive and  
CD-ROM drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, CD-ROM, and accessories including keyboard and  
mouse.  
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover)  
The security lock on the front of the server is used to lock the front door.  
Open the front door when turning on/off the server, accessing the floppy disk drive, CD-ROM drive, and/or 5.25-inch  
device, and installing/removing the hard disk drive into/from the 3.5-inch disk bay.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Use the security key coming with the server to release the security lock.  
Some software applications have a command to eject a media in the CD-ROM drive or  
5.25-inch device bay. Make sure that the front door is open before executing such a  
command. If the command is executed while the front door is closed, the tray of the  
CD-ROM drive or a media in the 5.25-inch device will strike the front door causing the  
server failure.  
Lock the front door  
Unlock the front door.  
Unlock the front door, hold the handle half height on the left side of the front door and pull it toward you to open. When  
you close the front door, lock it with security key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22  
POWER Switch  
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.  
Power On  
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights green.  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS (Uninterruptible  
Power Supply), make sure that the power control device is powered.  
„
If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagnosis of the hardware starts.  
The POWER switch does not work while in diagnosis. Wait for about 30 seconds, then  
press the POWER switch.  
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen. The  
time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration. Approximately,  
it may take one to five minutes.  
POST  
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnosis feature saved in the I/O board of the server.  
When the power of the server is turned on, POST automatically runs to check the I/O board, memory board, processor,  
keyboard, and mouse. During POST messages indicating the starts of several BIOS setup utilities may also appear.  
At shipment of the server, it is set to have our logo appear on the display unit during POST. Pressing Esc allows the  
information on the execution of POST to be displayed.  
NOTE: The information on the result of diagnosis by POST can be displayed from the  
start without the depression of Esc on the BIOS menu. If you desire it, change the setting  
of "Boot-time Diagnosis Screen" on "Advanced" of the BIOS SETUP to "Enabled."  
It may not always necessary to check the result of POST. Check the messages which may appear during POST in the  
following cases:  
„ Installation of the server  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-23  
„ Suspicion of failure  
„ Beep for many times in the period from power-on to operating system start  
„ Appearance of an error message on the display unit  
POST Flow  
The flow of operations executed by POST is sequentially described below:  
IMPORTANT: Depending on the system configuration, the message "Press Any Key"  
requesting key entry may appear on the display screen. This is requested by BIOS on an  
installed optional board. See the explanation described in the manual for the option and  
press any key.  
1. After power-on, POST is activated to start memory check. The message indicating the counted size of base  
memory and that of additional memory appears at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, the  
following message appears at the bottom of the screen.  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
NOTE: If you change the factory-default for [Extended RAM Step] in [Advanced] menu  
of BIOS SETUP and execute the memory test, pressing Space allows the memory test to  
be skipped.  
It may take several minutes to complete memory check depending on the size of the memory installed in the  
server. Similarly, it may take about a minute to display the proper information on the screen at rebooting.  
2. Detects the RAID controller built in the server and displays the message prompting the start of the  
MegaRAID Configuration utility (without any key entry for several seconds, POST is automatically  
continued). Press the proper keys according to the screen display.  
LSI MegaRAID BIOS  
Version XXX (Build XXX XX XXXX)  
Copyright(C) 2005 LSI Logic Corp.  
HA-X (Bus XX Dev XX) MegaRAIS SCSI 320-2E  
Standard FW XXXX DRAM = 256MB (SDRAM)  
Battery module is present on adapter  
Channel-0 ID-14 -- XXX XXXXX  
Channel-1 ID-14 -- XXX XXXXX  
X Logical Drive(s) found on the host adapter.  
X Logical Drive(s) handled by BIOS  
Press <Ctrl><M> or <Enter> to Run Config Utility  
Or Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS  
Now press Enter to start the utility. Do not use Ctrl + M to start the utility.  
For example, the SCSI BIOS setup utility must be used in the following cases:  
„ Installation of an SCSI device in the 5.25-inch device bay  
„ Connection of an external SCSI device (The removal of the SCSI cable for 5.25-inch device in the server  
and the connection of the SCSI cable coming with the server (for external connection) are required.)  
„ Modification of SCSI device connections within the server  
When the SCSI BIOS setup utility is terminated, the server runs POST from its start again.  
When more than one SCSI controller boards are installed on the PCI bus of the server, the messages  
indicating the starts of the SCSI BIOS setup utilities for the installed boards appear in the following order:  
PCI slot number PCI #3, PCI #4, PCI #5, PCI #8, PCI #9, PCI #6, PCI #7, PCI #1 and PCI #2. See Chapter 9,  
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots for details about boot priority.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24  
3. Displays the SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen.  
4. If one or more disk array controllers are installed, displays the message prompting you to start the Disk Array  
BIOS setup utility.  
Start the utility according to the message if you need to change the settings. Refer to the manuals of the disk  
array controllers for details.  
Without any entry, any of the following messages appears.  
Notes when pressing Ctrl and any other keys during POST:  
When you press Ctrl and any other keys during POST to start configuration utility or others, the key entry  
rarely becomes invalid. If it occurs, press Ctrl again to resume the operation.  
5. Displays the message notifying you the detection of the processor and the connected keyboard and mouse.  
6. Displays any of the following messages.  
Pattern 1:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network  
Pattern 2:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network  
Or Pattern 3:  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network  
Pattern 4:  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
* The displayed message may vary depending on the device status.  
NOTE: The operation or utility to be started at each key entry is described below. These  
operations or utilities may not always be started.  
„ Esc  
Press Esc to display the boot menu at the end of POST. This menu allows you to select  
the device to boot from.  
Boot Menu  
1. CD-ROM Drive  
2. +Removable Devices  
3. +Hard Drive  
4. IBA GE Slot 0B20 v1222  
5. IBA GE Slot 0B21 v1222  
<Enter Setup>  
„ F2  
Press F2 to start the BIOS setup utility. Start the utility to change the setting of the  
server to that fit to the environment in which the server is used. In general, the setting  
may not be particularly changed by starting the utility excluding the case in which the  
previous message accompanied by an error message appears. See Chapter 4 for setting  
procedures and features of the parameters.  
„ F4  
Press F4 to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition. See  
Chapter 6 for the maintenance partition.  
„ F12  
Press F12 to run the network boot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-25  
„ F1  
If message "Press <F1> to resume" appears, an error is detected during POST. See  
"Error messages during POST" for the information on the messages and the proper  
actions against the errors. If an error message appears, pressing F1 allows the BIOS  
setup utility to be started.  
7. When a password is set in the BIOS setup utility SETUP, the screen prompting you to enter the password  
appears after the normal termination of POST.  
The password can be entered for up to three times. If you enter the password incorrectly all the time, the  
server cannot be started. In this case, turn off the power of the server, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn  
on the power to start the server again.  
IMPORTANT: Set the password only after operating system is installed.  
8. Starts operating system at the termination of POST.  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the screen. See Chapter 8 for POST error codes.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before contacting your service  
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.  
Power Off  
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS, refer to the  
manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS.  
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server.  
1. Shut down the operating system.  
2. Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.  
3. Power off peripheral devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26  
SLEEP Switch  
The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode or sleep mode).  
NOTE: To use the SLEEP switch, an operating system supporting the sleep feature is  
required. (Available for Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000.)  
POWER switch  
SLEEP switch  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving mode. (The POWER/SLEEP  
lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous operations.  
To resume the original state, press the POWER switch. (It may take a little time to resume the original state.)  
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on the operating system  
in use. (Available for Windows 2000.)  
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into the power-saving  
mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you may fail to resume the original state.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-27  
Floppy Disk Drive  
Your server is equipped with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/read data to/from a floppy disk.  
Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:  
„ 2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)  
Stores data of 1.44 MB.  
„ 2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)  
Store data of 720 KB.  
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a floppy disk into the floppy disk  
drive.  
When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicks and the eject button on the  
floppy disk is slightly pushed out.  
NOTES:  
„
„
You cannot use a 1.2 MB-formatted floppy disk.  
When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the message notifying that date read is not  
available and the message prompting formatting are displayed. Refer to the manual that  
comes with the operating system to format the floppy disk.  
„
If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restarting the server with the floppy  
disk inserted boots the system from the floppy disk.  
To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.  
NOTE: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before ejecting the floppy disk.  
Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit may destroy the disk data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-28  
NOTE: Use of the floppy disk  
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care.  
Keep the following notes in mind to use it:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.  
Attach the label to the correct position.  
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
Do not open the shutter.  
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke.  
Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid (e.g., water) and chemicals.  
Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet).  
Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it.  
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.  
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental  
erasure. You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data  
into the floppy disk or format it. We recommend that you should write-protect any  
floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data. To write-protect  
a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.  
Write-protect switch  
Write  
Write  
disable enable  
„
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as  
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we  
recommend that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular  
basis. (Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk provided with the  
server.)  
CD-ROM Drive  
Your server is equipped with the CD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD-ROM (read-only compact disk).  
The CD-ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may  
cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD-ROM drive.  
Set a CD-ROM on the CD-ROM drive as follows:  
1. Confirm that the power of the server is on (with the POWER/SLEEP lamp being lit green) before inserting the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-29  
CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out a little.  
3. Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops.  
4. Put the CD-ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the date recorded surface facing toward the tray.  
5. As shown in the figure below, hold the tray with a hand and press the CD-ROM with fingers of another hand  
to make the hole of the CD-ROM fit to the rotor at the centre of the tray.  
Rotor  
Press this part of  
CD-ROM.  
6. Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive.  
IMPORTANT: If a noisy sound in driving the CD-ROM drive occurs after setting a  
CD-ROM, set it again correctly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-30  
To take out the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, press the Eject button in the similar way in setting the CD-ROM to  
make the tray go out.  
If the access lamp is lit in orange, the CD is being accessed. Confirm that the access lamp is not lit before pressing the  
Eject button.  
As shown in the figure above, hold the tray with a hand and take the end of the CD-ROM lightly by the fingers of  
another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the center of the tray to remove the CD-ROM from the tray.  
After taking out the CD-ROM, return the tray into the drive.  
When you fail to eject the CD-ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD-ROM from the server, follow the  
procedure below.  
1. Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)  
2. Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a straightened large paper clip  
will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the upper front of the CD-ROM drive and gently push it in  
until the tray is ejected.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.  
If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD-ROM, contact your service  
representative.  
Emergency hole  
3. Hold the tray and pull it out.  
4. Take out the CD-ROM.  
5. Push the tray back into position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-31  
NOTE: Use of the CD-ROM  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:  
„
The playback of disks that do not conform to the CD-ROM standards with the  
CD-ROM drive is not guaranteed.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Do not drop the CD-ROM.  
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.  
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.  
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.  
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.  
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point  
pen.  
„
„
Keep the CD-ROM away from cigarette smoke.  
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
„
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its  
centre to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.  
Use CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or  
thinner.  
„
„
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.  
If the CD-ROM emits loud noise in the CD-ROM drive, remove the CD-ROM and  
insert it back again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-32  
This page is intentionally left blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Setting Up Your Server  
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3-2  
SETUP FLOW  
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.  
Selecting a site  
Select a suitable site for the server.  
Unpacking the system  
Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box.  
Connecting peripheral devices  
Connect peripheral devices to the server.  
Connecting the power cord  
Connect the power cord to the server.  
Turning on the server  
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal  
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.  
Installing the operating system  
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.  
Installing the utilities  
Install the utilities in the provided EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
See Chapter 6.  
Making backup copies of system information  
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system  
information.  
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after  
replacing the system board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
SELECTING A SITE  
Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server. The following describes installation of  
the server and connections to the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Never attempt to lift the server with three or less persons.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server.  
Room that satisfies the following  
Close enough to  
connect the mouse  
and the display.  
conditions for operation: *  
Temperature: 10 to 35ºC  
Humidity: 20 to 80% (no  
condensation)  
Place having available  
space of 150 mm or more in  
front and rear of the server.  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to  
240 Vac parallel  
bi-polar wall power  
outlet with the ground  
Install the server on the  
floor or rigid, flat desk.  
Clean and tidy room  
Wall outlet to connect the  
supplied power cord.  
Place having a space enough to fully  
open the front door (The front door  
extrudes about 35 mm from the left  
side of the server when fully opened.)  
* It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where  
temperature is in the range between 15 to 25ºC.  
When you have selected a server site, hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons and carry it to the site,  
then place it slowly and gently.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the server by its front door to lift the server. The front door  
may be disengaged and damage the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
Do not place the server in the following places. Placing the server in such places may cause malfunctions of the server.  
„ Places with drastic changes in temperature (e.g., near a heater, air conditioner, or refrigerator)  
„ Places with strong vibration  
„ Places where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia,  
ozone, etc) exist.  
And also, places where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium  
chloride) or conductive metals.  
„ On a non-anti-static carpet  
„ Places with possibilities of falling objects  
„ Places near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio, broadcast/communication antenna,  
power transmission wire, and electromagnetic crane) is placed (If unavoidable, contact your service  
representative to request proper shield construction.)  
„ Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another (especially the one to which a device  
with large power consumption is connected) must be used for the server  
„ Places near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/power off of commercial  
power supply through a relay). If you must install the server close to such equipment, contact your service  
representative for separate power cabling or noise filter installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM  
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping boxes are damaged,  
note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing the contents of the containers, keep the  
cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with  
the carrier immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for a wide variety of peripheral devices  
on its rear panel. The figures on the next pages illustrate available peripheral devices for the server in the standard  
configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Plug in to a proper power source.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Do not use any unauthorized power cord.  
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power  
source.  
Device with USB Interface  
Device with serial  
(e.g., keyboard)  
interface (e.g.,  
To connect the device having  
modem)  
USB2.0 interface, use the USB  
connector on the rear panel.  
FRONT  
NOTE: Make sure of the cable you are going to connect. The ICMB connector and the  
front serial port B connector of this server have the same shape as the LAN connector. Be  
careful not to connect a cable to a wrong connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
Finally connect the provided  
power cord to the receptacle.  
If connecting the server to UPS,  
see the explanation below.  
Use this inlet only  
when an optional  
power supply unit is  
additionally installed.  
Mouse  
Printer with  
Keyboard  
parallel interface  
Device with serial  
interface (e.g.,  
modem)  
Display  
unit  
Hub  
(multiport repeater)  
Device with USB interface (USB2.0)  
(e.g., terminal adapter)  
Hub  
(multiport repeater)  
REAR  
Network system on LAN  
(connected via a hub)  
Management Only  
Device with ICMB interface  
(e.g., disk expansion unit)  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection. Connecting a powered  
peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures.  
„
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the server, contact your  
service representative for availability of such a device or cable. Some third-party  
devices may not be used for the server.  
„
A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
CONNECTING POWER CORD  
Connect the provided power cord to the server.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Use the authorized power cord only.  
1. Plug the provided power cord into the AC inlet on the rear of the server.  
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.  
3. Secure the power cord with a cable tie.  
Lever  
Lock spring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
To connect the power cord from the server to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), use service outlets on the rear of  
the UPS.  
The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UN-SWITCH OUT. (They may be called  
"OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)  
To control power supply with an application (ESMPRO UPS Controller) that controls the UPS, connect the power cord  
to a SWITCH OUT outlet.  
For constant power supply, connect the power cord to an UN-SWITCH OUT outlet. (Plug a modem that has a  
permanent connection to this outlet.)  
<Example>  
2
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT(SWITCH OUT)  
(UNSWITCH OUT)  
AC100V 50/50HZ  
UN-SWITCH OUT  
(OUTPUT 2)  
SWITCH OUT  
(OUTPUT 1)  
When the power cord is connected from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with power  
supply from the UPS.  
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10  
TURNING ON THE SERVER  
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.  
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:  
„
Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before installation. If the  
server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-PCI bridge installed, the SETUP utility is  
enabled to launch. Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires  
pre-installation setups before actually installing the board.  
„
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices require setups before  
proceeding to the next step.  
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic board, install the  
desired operating system to the server.  
1. Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD-ROM drive contains no bootable  
CD-ROM.  
2. Press the POWER switch.  
NOTES:  
„
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the UPS, turn on the  
power control unit.  
„
Connect the power cord and wait for about 30 seconds before pressing the POWER  
switch. The POWER switch does not work for about 30 seconds after connecting the  
power cord due to BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) firmware start-up.  
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen. The  
time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration. Approximately,  
it may take one to five minutes.  
POWER switch  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.  
In a few seconds, our logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST) begins.  
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation (Ctrl + Alt  
+ Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral  
devices, and boots the operating system (if installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.  
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error  
requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for troubleshooting information.)  
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test. Depending on  
the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to complete the memory test.  
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with our logo screen. You can  
always change our logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the start-up  
screen, use the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on  
system board or on an installed option board.  
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup. For the BIOS SETUP  
for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board, refer to the manual that comes with the option  
board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12  
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM  
See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003.  
To install other operating systems than listed above, contact your service representative.  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by  
using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP". See Chapter 4 detail.  
INSTALLING UTILITIES  
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information as follows:  
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Configuring Your Server  
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.  
When you install the server for the first time or install/remove optional devices, thoroughly read this chapter for better  
understanding and correct setups.  
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~  
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is pre-installed in the  
flash memory of the server and ready to run.  
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions. Thus,  
you do not need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases  
described below.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.  
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is provided with two levels  
of password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and  
change all system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system  
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
„
„
Do not set any password before installing the operating system.  
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog boxes appear on your  
SETUP utility, thus, may differ from descriptions in this manual. If you find anything  
unclear, see the online help or ask your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4-2  
Starting SETUP Utility  
To run the SETUP utility, do as follows:  
1. Power on the server.  
Our logo appears on the screen (the POST screen may appear depending on the setting in SETUP.).  
After a while, any of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen.  
Pattern 1:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network  
Pattern 2:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network  
Or  
Pattern 3:  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network  
Pattern 4:  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network  
* The displayed message varies depending on the device status.  
2. Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.  
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears. Enter the  
password.  
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive  
times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.  
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With the  
Supervisor password, you can view and change all system parameters. With the User  
password, system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage  
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the  
screen.)  
Indicates the current menu.  
Setup item menu  
Indicates there  
are submenus.  
Online help  
window  
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu  
Explanation of key functions  
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently selected.  
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or Exit menu.  
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a submenu option (an option  
preceded by "f") is selected, these keys are disabled.  
Cursor (↑, ↓):  
Cursor (←, →):  
– and +:  
Enter  
Esc  
F1:  
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.  
Displays the previous screen.  
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help screen for SETUP operations  
appears. Press Esc to return to the previous screen.  
F9:  
F10:  
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the factory set parameter.  
Saves the modifications and exits Setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Configuration Examples  
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for system operations.  
Link with Management Software  
To link with the temperature monitoring feature of ESMPRO Agent  
Select [Server] - [Thermal Sensor] - [Enabled].  
To control power supply of the server with ESMPRO Manager via the network  
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake On Lan/PME] - [Enabled].  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].  
UPS  
To link power supply with the UPS  
„ To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On].  
„ To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used to  
power off  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Last State].  
„ To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].  
Boot  
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server  
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.  
To display POST check results  
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].  
You can also press Esc while our logo is on the screen to display POST check results.  
To control from the HW console  
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.  
Memory  
To enable the memory degradation feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].  
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the  
following figure.  
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.  
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*  
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
DIMM #4  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #1  
To enable the memory mirroring feature or memory RAID feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory RAS Feature], and select [Mirror] or [RAID].  
Processor  
To enable the processor degradation feature  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].  
To check the installed processor status  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen processor numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the  
following figure.  
To clear the processor error information  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.  
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*  
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.  
Processor #1  
Processor #3  
Processor #2  
Processor #4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
Security  
To set passwords on the BIOS  
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.  
Supervisor password and User password can be set separately, and only User password has a restriction to  
access to SETUP utility.  
To enable/disable the POWER switch and SLEEP switch  
„
„
To disable  
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Enabled].  
To enable  
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Disabled].  
IMPORTANT: Enabling [Power Switch Inhibit] disables forced shutdown (see Chapter 8)  
as well as power on/off using the POWER switch.  
To set the secure mode  
Select [Security] - [Secure Mode] and set each item.  
External Devices  
To set up external devices  
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] and set up each device.  
Internal Devices  
To set up internal PCI devices of the server  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] and set up each device.  
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)  
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes].  
PCI Hot Plug  
To install the PCI board with the PCI hot plug  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]  
* The setting varies depending on the PCI board subject to the hot plug. See the table below.  
Board name  
Setting Value  
Minimum  
Minimum  
100BASE-TX Adapter  
1000BASE-T Adapter  
1000BASE-TX Adapter  
Minimum  
Saving the Configuration Data  
To save the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] or [Save Changes].  
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes] or [Discard Changes].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
To resume the default BIOS configuration data (may differ from factory-set value)  
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].  
To save the current value as user default  
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].  
To load the user-defined default  
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions  
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:  
„ Main  
„ Advanced  
„ Security  
„ Server  
„ Boot  
„ Exit  
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes available functions and  
parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
Main  
After entering SETUP, the Main menu appears first. To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a  
submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.  
The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below.  
Option  
Parameter  
HH:MM:SS  
MM/DD/YYYY  
Disabled  
1.2MB  
720Kb  
Description  
Set the time.  
Set the date.  
Set the settings of floppy disk drive A  
(standard configuration).  
Your Setting  
System Time  
System Date  
Legacy Floppy A  
5 1/4"  
3 1/2"  
Normally set to "1.44/1.25 MB 3.5".  
[1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"]  
2.88MB 3 1/2"  
[Disabled]  
Legacy Floppy B  
Set the settings of floppy disk drive B.  
Set to "Disabled" since the server does not  
support drive B.  
1.2MB  
720Kb  
5 1/4"  
3 1/2"  
1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"  
2.88MB 3 1/2"  
[Disabled]  
Hard Disk Pre-Delay  
Wait for the specified time until the first  
access to the IDE device during POST.  
3 seconds  
6 seconds  
9 seconds  
12 seconds  
15 seconds  
21 seconds  
30 seconds  
–
Primary IDE  
Master/Primary IDE  
Slave  
Displays the information on the device  
connected to each channel on the submenu.  
(Display only)  
Language  
[English (US)]  
French  
Select the language used for SETUP.  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
Processor Settings  
Selecting "Processor Settings" on the Main menu shows the following submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Processor Retest  
[No]  
Yes  
–
Clears the error information on the processor.  
Processor Speed  
Setting  
Indicates the frequency of the processor.  
Processor 1-4  
CPUID  
–
A numeral indicates the ID of processor. "Disabled"  
indicates that the processor is defected by BMC.  
"Not Installed" indicates that the processor is not  
installed.  
(Display only)  
Processor 1-4  
L2 Cache Size  
Processor 1-4  
L3 Cache Size  
–
–
Indicates the L2 cache of processor.  
Indicates the L3 cache size if the processor has L3  
cache memory.  
Hyper-Threading  
Technology  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Setting this item to "Enabled" allows the  
hyper-threading technology to be used in the ACPI  
mode. From operating system that supports  
Hyper-Threading Technology feature, the specified  
number of processors is twice as many as the actual  
number of the installed processors.  
Execute Disable  
Bit  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Disables or enables the Execute Disable Bit feature of  
the processor.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
Advanced  
The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Advanced."  
To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
Boot-time  
Diagnostic  
Screen  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the self-diagnosis (POST) running screen is  
displayed or not on booting.  
If this item is set to "Disabled," our logo appears during POST.  
(Pressing Esc in the status causes the screen display to be  
switched to the POST execution screen.  
The Boot-time Diagnostic Screen is automatically enabled if the  
Console Redirection is enabled.  
Reset  
Configuration  
Data  
[No]  
Yes  
Select "Yes" to clear the extended system configuration data  
area (system information stored by POST). The parameter is  
changed to "No" after the system is booted.  
NumLock  
On  
Specify whether the NumLock is enabled or disabled on  
booting.  
[Off]  
[Boot]  
Halt  
Memory/  
Processor Error  
Indicates whether POST is paused at the occurrence of a  
processor or memory error during the execution of POST.  
When processor error or Memory error is encountered, the  
utility is not paused at the end of POST if this item is set to  
"Halt" and even though "POST Error Pause" of "Server" menu is  
"Enabled".  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
Memory Configuration  
Selecting "Memory Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
DIMM Group Normal  
Indicates the current memory status.  
#1 - #8  
Status  
Not installed  
Disabled  
"Normal" indicates that the memory devices operate normally.  
"Disabled" indicates that one or more memory devices are  
defected.  
"Not Installed" indicates that no memory devices are installed.  
(Display only)  
Memory  
Retest  
[No]  
Yes  
Clears the DIMM group error status information. Run this menu  
when the failed DIMM(s) are replaced.  
Extended  
RAM Step  
1MB  
1KB  
"1MB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1MB.  
"1KB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1KB.  
Every Location "Every-Location" indicates that every memory device is tested.  
[Disabled]  
Online Spare [Disabled]  
Memory Enabled  
Memory RAS [Normal]  
"Disabled" indicates that only memory initialization is done.  
Select "Enabled" to enable the Online Spare Memory feature.  
Set the memory configuration. Select "Mirror" to enable the  
memory mirroring function. Select "RAID" to enable the memory  
RAID function.  
Feature  
Mirror  
RAID  
Hot-Add  
Memory  
Support  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether to use the Hot-Add Memory feature on  
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition or Datacenter  
Edition. Select "Enabled" to use the Hot-Add Memory feature.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
PCI Configuration  
Selecting "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Selecting an item on the screen  
allows the proper submenu to appear.  
See the table blow for the items.  
Option  
PCI Slot 1-9  
Option ROM  
Parameter  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Disables/enables the Option ROM BIOS on the PCI bus.  
When the graphic accelerator board is installed or the disk  
array controller or SCSI controller boards to be installed  
are connected to the hard disk in which operating system  
is installed, set this item to "Enabled." When the LAN  
controller board with installation of the option ROM BIOS  
is used but the board does not provide network booting,  
set this item to "Disabled."  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
Hot-plug PCI Control  
Selecting "Hot-plug PCI Control" on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen.  
See the table blow for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Minimum  
Middle  
Description  
Your Setting  
Reserving  
memory space for  
PHP  
Determines memory space at every empty slot for PHP  
(PCI Hot-plug).  
Reserved memory space is:  
[Disabled]  
Maximum  
None  
[Minimum]  
6 (2+4) MB  
[Middle]  
48 (16+32) MB  
[Maximum]  
96 (32+64) MB  
[
]: Factory-set  
NOTE: The bus number of PCI slot varies depending on whether this parameter is set to  
"Disabled" or others. Pay attention when you need to setup the program again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
Embedded SCSI/Embedded NIC/Embedded Video Controller  
Selecting "Embedded SCSI", "Embedded NIC", or "Embedded Video Controller" on the PCI Configuration submenu  
shows the following screen.  
See the table blow for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
SCSI Controller  
LAN Controller  
Video Controller  
Option ROM Scan*  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Indicates whether the on-board controller is enabled or  
disabled.  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Displays the submenu for indicating whether the  
expansion of BIOS of on-board controller is enabled or  
disabled.  
Do not set this option to "Disabled".  
[
]: Factory-set  
* Only displayed for SCSI and LAN controllers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Peripheral Configuration  
Selecting "Peripheral Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen..  
See the table below for the items.  
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not overlapped with  
others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O address is used in another resource, the  
yellow asterisk (*) appears. Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
Option  
Serial Port A  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
[3F8]  
2F8  
3E8  
Description  
Your Setting  
Specify whether serial port A is enabled or disabled.  
Base I/O Address  
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial  
port A. These menus are displayed when the Serial  
port A is enabled.  
2E8  
Interrupt  
IRQ 3  
[IRQ 4]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
3F8  
[2F8]  
3E8  
Serial Port B  
Base I/O Address  
Specify whether serial port B is enabled or disabled.  
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial  
port B. These menus are displayed when the Serial  
port B is enabled.  
2E8  
Interrupt  
Parallel Port  
Mode  
[IRQ 3]  
IRQ 4  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Output Only  
Bi-directional  
EPP  
Specify whether the parallel port is enabled or  
disabled.  
Selects the parallel port operation mode, base  
address, interrupt (IRQ), and DMA channel. These  
menus are displayed when the Parallel Port is enabled.  
[ECP]  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
[378]  
278  
IRQ 5  
[IRQ 7]  
[DMA 1]  
DMA 3  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
DMA channel  
PS/2 Mouse  
USB Controller  
Specify whether the mouse is enabled or disabled.  
Specify whether the USB controller is enabled or  
disabled.  
Legacy USB  
Support  
Specify whether the USB keyboard is made available  
in operating system which does not support USB  
formally.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
Advanced Chipset Control  
Selecting "Advanced Chipset Control" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Positioning the cursor on a  
menu (item preceded by symbol "f") and pressing Enter opens the corresponding submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Multimedia Timer  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Description  
Selecting "Enabled" enables this function if the  
operating system supports HPET feature.  
Your Setting  
Wake On  
LAN/PME  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the remote power-on function through  
network is enabled or disabled.  
Wake On Ring  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the remote power-on function through  
a serial port is enabled or disabled.  
Wake On RTC  
Alarm  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the remote power-on function through  
an RTC alarm is enabled or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
PCI Device  
Selecting "PCI Device" on "Advanced Chipset Control" of the Advanced menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
PCI IRQ line 1 - 5  
PCI IRQ line 8  
Disabled  
[Auto Select]  
Set the assignment of each of 7 interrupt signals on  
the PCI bus to a specific IRQ request.  
Parameter "11" cannot be selected if they are the same  
as those set for BMC IRQ in the Server menu.  
3
5
6
7
9
10  
11  
12  
14  
15  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Security  
Positioning the cursor to "Security" shows the following screen.  
Selectable only when  
User Password is  
registered  
Selectable only when  
User Password is  
registered  
If you press Enter with the selection of either "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password," such a screen as  
shown below appears (the screen shown in the figure below appears when "Set Supervisor Password" is selected).  
Specify the passwords on the dialog box. Enter each of the passwords with up to seven characters including  
alphanumeric characters and symbols.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Set the passwords only after operating system is installed.  
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Set User  
Up to seven  
alphanumeics  
Up to seven  
alphanumeics  
Press Enter to display the user password input screen. For  
this password, accessing to the SETUP menu is restricted.  
Press Enter to display the supervisor password input screen.  
This password enables all the SETUP menus to be accessed.  
This setting can be done only on login with the password input  
of "Supervisor" at start of SETUP.  
Password  
Set Supervisor  
Password  
Password on boot [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the passwords are entered or not on booting.  
At first the supervisor password must be set. If the supervisor  
password is set and this option is invalid, BIOS determines  
that a user is booting.  
Fixed disk boot  
sector  
Secure Mode  
Timer  
[Normal]  
Prevents data from being written to hard disks.  
Write Protect  
[Disabled]  
1 minute  
Specify the period from no input from the keyboard or mouse  
to the point at which the system enters into the secure mode.  
2 minutes  
5 minutes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
Option  
Parameter  
10 minutes  
20 minutes  
60 minutes  
120 minutes  
[L]  
Description  
Your Setting  
Hot Key  
(CTRL+ALT+)  
Specify the key with which the secure mode is started. Press  
the selected key with the Ctrl and Alt pressed to start the  
secure mode.  
Z
Secure Mode Boot [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the server is operated in the secure mode at  
the start of the server.  
Video Blanking  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the monitor is disconnected if the server is  
entered into the secure mode.  
Floppy Write  
Protect  
Power Switch  
Inhibit  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether data write to the floppy disk inserted into the  
floppy disk drive is enabled or disabled in the secure mode.  
Specify whether the power switch is enabled or disabled. If this  
item is set to "Enabled," the power cannot be turned off by  
using the POWER switch (including the forced shutdown). The  
system cannot also enter the power saving mode by pressing  
the SLEEP switch.  
[
]: Factory-set  
NOTE: The Secure Mode is used to restrict access from unauthorized users. In the Secure  
Mode, the POWER switch, SLEEP switch, RESET switch, keyboard and mouse are  
disabled. The lamps on the keyboard flash in order from the ScrollLock lamp, the  
CapsLock lamp, and the NumLock lamp. To resume server operation in the normal state  
from the Secure Mode, enter the user password from the keyboard and press Enter key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
Server  
Positioning the cursor on "Server" shows the Server menu.  
The items which can be set on the Server menu and their functions are described below. For the setting, first select  
"System Management" or "Console Redirection" and press Enter to display the proper submenu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Assert NMI Disabled  
on PERR [Enabled]  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or not.  
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error  
through the NMI when an error occurred.  
Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or not.  
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error  
through the NMI when an error occurred.  
Assert NMI Disabled  
on SERR  
[Enabled]  
FRB-2  
Policy  
Disable FRB2 Timer Set this item to "Disable BSP".  
[Disable BSP]  
Do Not Disable BSP  
Retry 3 Times  
Boot  
[Disabled]  
Indicates whether the boot monitoring function is enabled or  
Monitoring 5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
20 minutes  
25 minutes  
30 minutes  
35 minutes  
40 minutes  
45 minutes  
50 minutes  
55 minutes  
60 minutes  
disabled on booting.  
To use this function, install ESMPRO Agent. Do not use this  
function if the system is booted from operating system  
without installation of ESMPRO Agent or CD-ROM. Set this  
item to "Disabled" if ARCServe uses the Disaster Recovery  
Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Boot  
[Retry 3 Times]  
Appears when the boot monitoring feature is enabled. This  
item indicates the processing at the occurrence of timeout  
during boot monitoring.  
Monitoring Retry Service Boot  
Policy  
Always Retest  
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the system is reset after the  
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried up  
to three times. The failure in the third boot causes the boot to  
be tried from the service partition.  
If [Retry Service Boot] is selected, the system is reset after  
the occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is  
retried up to three times. Then the boot is tried from the  
service partition for three times.  
If [Always Reset] is selected, the system is reset after the  
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried  
repeatedly.  
Thermal  
Sensor  
BMC IRQ  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[IRQ 11]  
Indicates whether the temperature sensor monitoring function  
is enabled or disabled.  
Indicates the IRQ of the BMC interrupt.  
Post Error  
Pause  
AC-LINK  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Stay Off  
[Last State]  
Power On  
Indicates whether POST is aborted once at the end of POST  
if an error occurs during the execution of POST.  
Indicates the AC-LINK function. Shows the state of the power  
of the server.  
Power ON [0] - 255  
Delay Time  
Sets the power on delay time when "Power On" or "Last  
State" is specified for AC LINK.  
FRU LED  
Feature  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Select "Enabled" to turn on the error lamp to identify the  
location if the system detects a failure.  
Clear FRU [No]  
Select "Yes" to turn off the FRU LED. When the faulty  
component is replaced, turn off the FRU LED.  
Enables or disables the Platform Event Filtering feature of the  
baseboard management controller (BMC).  
LED  
Yes  
Platform  
Event  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Filtering  
[
]: Factory-set  
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again, depending on  
the setting of "AC-LINK."  
Setting of AC-LINK  
System status before AC power off  
Stay Off  
Off  
Last State  
Power On  
Operating  
Aborting (DC power being off also)  
Forced shutdown  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
* Press the power switch continuously at least four seconds. This forcibly turns off the power.  
IMPORTANT: Set this item to "Power on" in order to link the AC power source supplied  
from UPS when the server is connected to UPS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
System Management  
Selecting "System Management" on the Server menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
BIOS Version  
Board Part #  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Indicates the version of BIOS. (Display only)  
Indicates the IO board information. (Display only)  
Indicates the system information. (Display only)  
Indicates the chassis information. (Display only)  
Board Serial #  
System Part #  
System Serial #  
Chassis Part #  
Chassis Serial #  
BMC Device ID  
BMC Device Rev  
BMC Firmware Rev  
SDR Rev  
Indicates the BMC (Baseboard Management  
Controller) information. (Display only)  
Indicates the revision of SDR (Sensor Data Record).  
(Display only)  
PIA Rev  
ARM MAC Address  
–
–
Indicates the revision of PIA. (Display only)  
Indicates the default DNS (Hostname) of  
Management LAN Port. (Display only)  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
Console Redirection  
Selecting "Console Redirection" on the Server menu shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
BIOS Redirection  
Port  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Serial Port A  
Serial Port B  
[Disabled]  
Description  
Your Setting  
Selects the port to be used as the redirection port. The  
parameters specified in Peripheral Configuration  
submenu is used as address and interrupt.  
ACPI Redirection  
Port  
Specify the I/O port address or interrupt level used in  
ACPI headless console redirection.  
If [Disabled] is selected, console redirection feature is  
disabled.  
Serial Port A  
Serial Port B  
Baud Rate  
9600  
[19.2K]  
Specify the baud rate used for the interface with  
successive hardware consoles.  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Flow Control  
Console Type  
None  
Specify the flow control method.  
Specify the console type.  
XON/XOFF  
[CTS/RTS]  
CTS/RTS+CD  
PC ANSI  
[VT100+]  
VT-UTF8  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Remote Console  
Reset  
Specify whether the reset from remote console is  
enabled or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
Event Log Configuration  
Selecting "Event Log Configuration" on the Server menu and pressing Enter shows the following screen.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Clear All Event Log  
–
Press Enter and select "Yes" to clear the system event  
log.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
Boot  
Positioning the cursor on "Boot" shows the Boot menu which is used to set the boot priority.  
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting. Finding the boot software, the server starts the  
software.  
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the ↑, ↓, +, and - keys. Move the cursor to the desired device  
with the ↑ or ↓ key and change the priority with the + or - key.  
IMPORTANT: To boot EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of the devices as shown in  
the figure above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
Exit  
Positioning the cursor to "Exit" shows the Exit menu.  
The options on the menu are described below.  
Exit Saving Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory). The  
selection of "Exit Saving Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
If you select "Yes," SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS (non-volatile memory).  
Then the server automatically reboots the system.  
Exit Discarding Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory).  
Selecting "Yes" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If the setting value is  
modified, the confirmation screen will appear.  
Selecting "No" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If you select "Yes" in the  
next screen, SETUP is terminated with the modified information saved in CMOS. Then the server automatically reboots  
the system.  
Load Setup Defaults  
Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values. Selecting "Load Setup Defaults" causes the  
confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to return the values to the default values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu screen.  
Save Custom Defaults/Load Custom Defaults  
Running the Save Custom Defaults menu saves the current SETUP parameters as the user-defined SETUP defaults. The  
Load Custom Defaults menu is used to restore the user-defined SETUP defaults.  
Discard Changes  
Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the values to CMOS.  
Selecting "Discard Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to discard the newly selected information and return to the previous values.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
Save Changes  
Select this item to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory) without the termination of  
SETUP. Selecting "Save Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.  
Select "Yes" to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
DISK ARRAY CONFIGURATION  
– MegaRAID Configuration Utility –  
MegaRAID Configuration Utility is a software application to configure the built-in hard disk drives in disk array  
configuration using the onboard disk array controller.  
Notes on Using  
Note the followings to correctly configure the disk array:  
„ There are different levels of recording RAID. This system supports RAID0, RAID1 and RAID5.  
– RAID 0  
Stores data on hard disks by dividing it (striping.)  
Striping is a technology to store data on disks according to some rules.  
Data is divided to be stored on multiple hard disks.  
Where is the figure?All hard disks can be accessed at the same time. This improves disk access  
performance compared with using a single hard disk.  
IMPORTANT: RAID0 does not have data redundancy. When hard disk failure occurs,  
data cannot be restored.  
– RAID 1  
Stores the data being saved to one hard disk drive to another hard disk drive.  
This method is called "mirroring." When storing data onto one hard disk drive, the same data is  
simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive becomes faulty, the one with  
the same data can be used.  
This provides operation without the system going down.  
– RAID 5  
Stores data onto hard disk drives by dividing it (striping) in the same way as RAID0. With RAID5, parity  
(redundant data) is also divided and stored on multiple hard disks. This is called "distributed parity."  
Distributed parity uses one section of a line divided with the set stripe size on hard disks in order.  
Data is saved in the following order: Stripe1, Stripe2, created parity. Disk space allocated as a parity  
section is the same as one hard disk within the RAID5 configuration.  
Even if one of the configured hard disks becomes faulty, data can be used without any problem.  
„ When you have configured or changed the disk array configuration, make a backup copy of the configuration  
information. You can use the Power Console Plus to make a backup copy. See the online document "Power  
Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
„ Check the consistency of disk array system on a regular basis.  
Consistency check is available for RAID5 or RAID1 only. Use one of the following three methods to check  
consistency.  
– Check by using this utility (described later in this section).  
– Perform scheduled task from the command prompt after operating system start-up. (Refer to the online  
document "Power Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM or the manual  
that comes with the option board.)  
– Check by using the Power Console Plus. (Refer to the online document "Power Console Plus User's Guide"  
stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.)  
„ You can use the Power Console Plus to rebuild the failed hard disk drive as well as this utility. (Refer to the  
online document "Power Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.)  
„ If a hard disk drive is specified as the standby disk, the data in the failed hard disk drive can be automatically  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
recovered by using the auto rebuild feature. The hard disk drive to be used as a standby disk must have the  
same capacity and the same rotational speed as those of the other hard disk drives.  
„ The following 5 types of hard disk status are displayed by MegaRAID Configuration Utility. Each status is  
explained below:  
[READY] Not yet configured.  
[ONLIN] The disk is turned on and ready for normal operation. Configured into a pack.  
[HOTSP] The disk is on and in Hot spare disk status.  
[FAIL]  
Judged to be faulty by the controller. Cannot be used.  
[REBLD] Being rebuilt.  
Starting Configuration Utility  
MegaRAID Configuration Utility is stored in the BIOS of RAID controller on I/O board and started during POST  
activation.  
Starting MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Check that the following is displayed when you turn the power on your server  
„ The manufacturer’s logo  
„ The message “ Press <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network”  
Then press Esc, POST screen is displayed.  
Check that the following is displayed in the POST screen, then press Enter.  
NOTE: When Ctrl + H is blinking onscreen, do not press Ctrl + H. If you press these keys,  
WebBIOS starts after POST is completed. When WebBIOS is started, click [Control-M] at  
the upper right of the screen to start MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
MegaRAID Configuration Utility: TOP menu (Management Menu) screen  
NOTE: In some cases, the following display appears in the POST screen after replacing  
the I/O board. This indicates that both the disk array controller and hard disk have  
configuration information, and they do not match. (Shown below is a sample display.)  
Exiting from MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Press Esc in the TOP menu of MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
When a confirmation message appears, select [Yes].  
When the above message appears, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.  
The server is rebooted.  
Menu Tree  
Setting list  
+: Selection/execution parameter ‘: Setting parameter. •: Information display  
>: Can be set (modified) after creation of logical drive, #: Cannot be executed  
Menu  
Description  
+Configure  
Performs Configuration settings  
Set configuration (Using fixed value)  
Set new configuration  
+Easy Configuration  
+New Configuration  
+View/Add Configuration  
+Clear Configuration  
Additional setting / viewing configuration  
Clear configuration  
+Specify Bootable Logical Drive  
+Initialize  
+Objects  
Chose Bootable Logical Drive  
Initialize logical drive  
Various settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32  
Menu  
Description  
+Adapter  
+Clear Configuration  
Set disk array controller  
Clear configuration  
*1 ‘FlexRAID PowerFail  
*2 ‘Fast Initialization  
*3 ‘Disk Spin up Timing  
*4 ‘Cache Flush Timing  
*5 ‘Rebuild Rate  
Set whether to restart after rebuilding  
Set high-speed initialization  
Set hard disk spin-up  
Set cache flush timing  
Set rebuild rate  
*6 ‘Alarm Control  
Set alarm sound (ON / OFF)  
Board information display (FW version, etc.)  
+Other Adapter Information  
FW type  
• FW Supports  
• FW Ver  
FW version  
BIOS version  
Memory capacity  
Board series NO.  
Set default value  
• BIOS Ver  
• DRAM  
• Adapter Type  
+Factory Default  
*7 ‘Disable (Enable) BIOS  
Set BIOS Enable / Disable  
Battery information  
+Battery Information  
Existence of battery module  
Existence of battery pack  
Battery temperature  
• Backup Module  
• Battery Pack  
• Temperature  
Battery voltage  
• Voltage  
Set fast charging status  
The number charge cycle  
Clear battery charge counter  
Adapter detailed options  
• Fast Charging  
• No of Cycles  
+Reset Battery Charge Counter  
+Other Adapter Options  
*8 ‘Emulation  
*9 ‘Auto Rebuild  
• Initiator ID  
Set control mode  
Set auto rebuilding Enable / Disable  
Indicate Initiator ID No.  
*10 ‘Cluster Mode  
Set cluster mode  
*11 ‘Multiple PCI Delayed Trans  
*12 ‘Force Boot  
*13 ‘Coercion Algorithm  
‘Abort BI & CC Activities  
Set PCI bus bridge  
Forced setting of configuration information(HDD)  
Setting parameter for maximum hard disk capacity  
Abort Background initialize or Check Consistency  
*14 ‘CC Restoration  
*15 ‘Temporary Offline RAID  
+Logical Drive  
Select CC Restoration mode  
Set Temporary offline Enable / Disable  
Logical drive operation  
+Logical Drives  
Select logical drive  
+Initialize  
Initialize logical drive  
+Check Consistency  
+View/Update Parameters  
• RAID  
Check logical drive redundancy  
Display logical drive information  
Display RAID level  
Display logical drive capacity  
• SIZE  
Display stripe size  
Set write mode  
• Stripe SIZE  
+√ Write Policy  
Set read mode  
+√ Read Policy  
Set cache mode  
+√ Cache Policy  
Set virtual sizing Enable / Disable *Do not set to Enable  
+√ FlexRAID Virtual Sizing  
Display stripe size  
• #Stripes  
• State  
+Physical Drive  
+Physical Drive Selection Menu  
+Rebuild  
Display logical drive status  
Physical drive menu  
Physical drive operation  
Perform rebuilding  
+Format  
+Make Online  
Perform low level format  
Set the disk online  
*Do not use  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
Menu  
Description  
+Fail Drive  
Set the disk offline  
+Make HotSpare  
+View Drive Information  
• Device Type  
Set as stand-by disk for auto rebuilding  
Display hard disk information  
Hard disk type  
Hard disk capacity  
• Capacity  
Hard disk vender name  
Hard disk model  
• Vender ID  
• Product ID  
Hard disk revision  
• Revision  
SCSI standard  
• SCSI Standard  
• Media Errors  
• Other Errors  
‘Synchronous Negotiation  
‘SCSI Command Q Tagging  
The number of media errors  
The number of other errors  
SCSI synchronous negotiation  
Set SCSI command Q Tag  
Set channel  
*16  
*17  
+Channel  
+Channels  
Chose SCSI channel  
Set termination state  
Set auto termination state  
Set transfer rate  
*18  
*19  
*20  
‘Termination State  
‘Enable Auto Termination  
‘SCSI Transfer rate  
+Format  
+Rebuild  
Perform low level format  
Perform rebuilding  
*Do not use  
+Check Consistency  
+Select Adapter  
Perform logical drive redundancy check  
Select disk array controller  
* This menu item does not appear if no disk array controller is installed  
in the computer.  
Setting values  
No.  
*1  
Setting parameter  
FlexRAID PowerFail  
Fast Initialization  
Disk Spin-up Timing  
Cache Flush Timing  
Rebuild Rate  
Alarm Control  
Disable(Enable) BIOS  
Emulation  
Auto Rebuild  
Cluster Mode  
Multiple PCI Delayed Trans  
Force Boot  
Coercion Algorithm  
CC Restoration  
Temporary Offline RAID  
Synchronous Negotiation  
SCSI Command Q Tagging  
Termination State  
Enable Auto Termination  
SCSI Transfer rate  
Factory setting  
ENABLED  
ON  
2 disks every 6 secs  
Every 4 Seconds  
30%  
Disable Alarm  
Enable (Display: Disable BIOS)  
MASS STORAGE  
ENABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
ON  
NONE  
ENABLED  
Setting change  
Do not change  
Variable setting  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Variable setting  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Variable setting  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
Do not change  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*8  
*9  
*10  
*11  
*12  
*13  
*14  
*15  
*16  
*17  
*18  
*19  
*20  
ENABLED  
Enabled  
Enhanced QTAG Scheduling  
Enabled  
No  
320M  
Changing factory settings  
The settings for the following items can be changed. Follow each explanation:  
*2 Fast Initialization  
A setting of "On" is recommended.  
This initializes the top area of the disk only.  
A setting of "30%" is recommended.  
Factory setting is "ENABLED".  
*5 Rebuild Rate  
*14 CC Restoration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Notice status display of "Disable (Enable) BIOS".  
Selected Enable : Indicate "Disable BIOS"  
Selected Disable: Indicate "Enable BIOS"  
„
„
When "Factory Default" is executed, the setting values are changed.  
Set each parameter after executing "Factory Default."  
Some versions of MegaRAID Configuration Utility change the "Factory Default"  
setting value.  
Check each parameter setting after executing "Factory Default."  
„
The server must be restart after executing "Factory Default."  
Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility  
Creating/adding configuration  
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Set new configuration information (pack/logical drive settings)  
Check the logical drive settings  
Initialize logical drive  
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Procedures  
1. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.  
2. Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu (Management Menu).  
Select "View/add Configuration" to add configuration.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
When a new configuration is created by selecting "New Configuration," the existing  
configuration information is cleared. To add configuration information to that existing,  
select "View/add Configuration."  
"Easy Configuration" cannot set logical drive capacity or create SPANNING OF RAID1.  
Select "New Configuration" or "View/add Configuration" to execute these.  
3. When a confirmation message (Proceed?) is displayed, select "Yes."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
4. When SCAN DEVICE is started (scanning information is displayed at the bottom of the screen) and ends, the  
"New Configuration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU" screen appears.  
5. Move the cursor onto the hard disk to be packed by using cursor key and then press Space to select the hard  
disk. (The display for the selected hard disk changes from READY to ONLIN and Axx-xx blinks.)  
IMPORTANT: The channel number displayed on MegaRAID Configuration Utility is  
different form hardware channel number printed on the controller board.  
Channel number printed on the board  
CH0  
CH1  
Channel number displayed on MCU Channel-1 Channel-2  
6. When the hard disk is selected, press Enter to fix the selection (blinking stops.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
7. Press F10 to create logical drive. The "Logical Drives Configure" screen appears.  
8. Select "RAID," "Size" or "Advanced Menu" by using cursor keys. Then press Enter to fix the selection and  
set each value. Selecting "Advanced" displays the Advanced screen.  
– "RAID": Sets RAID level.  
Parameter  
Remarks  
0
1
5
-
-
-
The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disks that configure a pack.  
– "Size": Sets logical drive size.  
Up to 40 logical drives can be created per disk array controller.  
– "Advanced Menu"  
(a) "Stripe Size": Sets stripe size.  
Parameter  
Remarks  
248  
16  
–
–
32  
–
64  
Default display: recommended set value  
128  
(b) "Write Policy": Sets write policy.  
Parameter  
WRTHRU  
WRBACK  
Remarks  
Write through  
Write back (Default display)  
(c) "Read Policy": Sets read policy.  
Parameter  
Remarks  
NORMAL  
Does not perform read ahead.  
Default display: recommended set value  
Read ahead  
Performs read ahead when sequential  
sectors are accessed twice  
consecutively.  
READAHEAD  
ADAPTIVE  
(d) "Cache Policy": Sets cache policy.  
Parameter  
Remarks  
Cached IO  
Caches the data read from a hard disk  
and then transfers it to the server.  
Direct IO  
Default display: recommended set value  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
(e) "Span": Sets Span.  
Parameter  
CANSPAN  
NOSPAN  
Remarks  
SPAN=YES  
SPAN=NO  
When SPAN setting is available for the hard disk configuration of the pack, "YES" is displayed by  
default.  
When performing SPAN, create 2 or more sets of the same pack at pack creation. (For SPANNING  
OF RAID1 creation; refer to "Setting SPAN" described later for detailed procedures.)  
SPANNING  
SPANNING  
9. When all settings are completed, select "Accept" and then press Enter to create logical drive. The created  
logical drive is displayed in the "Logical Drive Configured" screen.  
10. After creating logical drive, press Esc to close the screen. Go back to the "Save Configuration?" screen and  
then select "Yes" to save the configuration.  
11. When the confirmation message shows that the configuration was saved, press Esc to return to the TOP menu  
screen.  
12. In the TOP menu screen, select "Objects" → "Logical Drive" → "View/Add Parameters" to check logical  
drive information. Setting values for "Write Policy," "Read Policy" and "Cache Policy" can be changed.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to check that " FlexRAID Virtual Sizing" is set to "DISABLED."  
Do not set it to "ENABLED."  
The virtual sizing function shows the operating system a large disk capacity virtually.  
Improper operation thus may disable operating system installation or disk capacity  
allocation.  
13. Select "Initialize" in the TOP menu screen.  
14. The "Logical Drives" screen appears to select the logical drive to be initialized. Pressing F2 selects all logical  
drives displayed.  
15. After selecting logical drive, press F10 to start initialization. A confirmation screen for execution appears.  
Select "Yes" to start initialization.  
16. When the meter display in the "Initialize Logical Drive Progress" screen indicates 100%, initialization is  
completed.  
17. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38  
Manual rebuilding  
Replace hard disk  
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Execute rebuilding  
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Procedures  
1. Replace a hard disk and turn on the controller.  
2. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.  
3. Select "Rebuild" from the TOP menu to display the "Rebuild – PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU"  
screen shown below.  
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk displaying "FAIL," and then press Space to select it.  
Multiple hard disks can be selected (simultaneous rebuilding.)  
5. The "FAIL" display for the hard disk selected starts blinking.  
6. When hard disk selection is completed, press F10 to start rebuilding.  
7. A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start rebuilding.  
8. When the meter display in the "Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress" screen indicates 100%, rebuilding is  
completed.  
9. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-39  
Setting hot spare  
Install a hard disk  
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Check/set parameters  
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Procedure  
1. Install a hard disk to be used as hot spare, and then turn the server on.  
2. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.  
3. Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" from the TOP menu to display the "Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE  
SELECTION MENU" screen shown below.  
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk to be used as hot spare and press Enter.  
5. The "Channel X,Target X" screen appears. Select "Make HotSpare."  
6. A confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes."  
7. The hard disk display is changed to "HOTSP."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40  
8. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
NOTES:  
„
„
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → "Fail Drive" to cancel the hot spare setting.  
When there are 2 or more hard disks (of the same capacity) set as hot spare, rebuilding  
is performed in order starting from the one with the smaller CH number/ID number.  
Checking consistency  
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Perform consistency check  
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility  
Procedure  
1. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
2. Select "Check Consistency" from the TOP menu.  
3. The "Logical Drives" screen appears. To run the consistency check, move the cursor onto the logical drive and  
press Space to select it. Pressing F2 selects all logical drives.  
4. When logical drive selection is completed, press F10 to start consistency check.  
A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start consistency check.  
5. When the meter display in the "Check Consistency Progress" screen indicates 100%, the consistency check is  
completed.  
6. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform consistency check after creating configuration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-41  
Setting SPAN  
The setting procedure for SPANNING OF RAID1 and SPANNING OF RAID5 are shown below  
SPANNING OF RAID1  
1. Open the configuration creation screen.  
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu to display the screen shown below. This is  
the Channel-1 menu screen where the cursor is put on ID=0 position:  
2. Select ID-0/1 hard disks.  
Pressing Space changes the display for Channel-1, ID=0 to "ONLIN A01-01" where "A01-01" is blinking.  
(The cursor automatically moves to Channel-1, ID=1.) In the same way, press Space on Channel-1, ID=1.  
(Where "A01-02" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=2.) After selecting 2 hard disks (Channel-1,  
ID=0/Channel-1, ID=1), press Enter to determine the settings. (Display on each hard disk stops blinking.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-42  
3. Select ID-2/3 hard disks.  
Same as for Channel-1 for ID-0/1, press Space in the status described in 2 to select Channel-1 for ID-2/3 and  
then press Enter to determine the selection. ("ONLIN A02-01/02" is then displayed.)  
4. Set logical drive.  
Pressing F10 in the status described in 3 displays a screen shown below. Set each item. Then select "Advance  
Menu" to display the "Advanced" sub menu screen.  
The setting contents are shown below:  
Setting item  
RAID  
Default (initial value)  
1
Setting range  
0, 1  
Size  
Advanced  
Full capacity (logical drive)  
64 KB  
WRBACK  
Full capacity  
2/4/8/16/32/64/128  
WRTHRU  
Stripe Size  
Write Policy  
WRBACK  
Read Policy  
Cache Policy  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
READAHEAD  
ADAPTIVE  
Direct IO  
Cache IO  
CANSPAN (YES)  
NOSPAN (NO)  
Direct IO  
YES  
Span  
– To open the "Advanced" sub menu screen from the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen, select "Advanced  
Menu" and then press Enter. Press Esc to move to the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen. In this case, the  
cursor moves to "Accept."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-43  
– When creating SPANNING OF RAID1 system, set logical drive size to full capacity. SPAN setting is  
disabled when the logical drive size is changed.  
5. Fix the settings  
After settings explained in 4 are completed, select "Accept" in the "Logical Drive X" screen and then press  
Enter to fix the settings. When settings are fixed, logical drive display in the "Logical Drive Configured"  
screen changes from green (not fixed) to light blue (fixed). The display color for the drive reveals whether a  
setting is fixed or not.  
To change the determined settings, press Esc to display the "Save Configuration?" screen and select "No."  
Start over from "New Configuration."  
6. Save the settings  
After fixing the settings in 5, press Esc or Enter. The "Save Configuration?" screen appears.  
Select "YES" and press Enter.  
After saving is completed, a pop-up window displays a save completion message. Press any key to return to  
the "Configure" screen. This completes the SPANNING OF RAID1 logical drive creation procedure.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform "Initialize" and "Check Consistency" after logical  
drive creation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44  
SPANNING OF RAID5  
1. Open the configuration creation screen.  
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu to display the screen shown below. This is  
the Channel-1 menu screen where the cursor is put on ID=0 position:  
2. Select ID-0/1/2 hard disks.  
Pressing Space changes the display for Channel-1, ID=0 to "ONLIN A01-01" where "A01-01" is blinking.  
(The cursor automatically moves to Channel-1, ID=1.) In the same way, press Space on Channel-1, ID=1.  
(Where "A01-02" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=2.) In the same way, press Space on  
Channel-1, ID=2. (Where "A01-03" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=3.) After selecting 3 hard  
disks (Channel-1, ID=0/Channel-1, ID=1/Channel-1, ID=2), press Enter to determine the settings. (Display  
on each hard disk stops blinking.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-45  
3. Select ID-3/4/5 hard disks  
Same as for Channel for ID-0/1/2, press Space in the status described in 3 to select Channel for ID-3/4/5 and  
then press Enter to determine the selection. ("ONLIN A02-01/02/03" is then displayed.)  
4. Set logical drive  
Pressing F10 in the status described in 3 displays a screen shown below. Set each item. Then select "Advance  
Menu" to display the "Advanced" sub menu screen.  
The setting contents are shown below:  
Setting item  
RAID  
Default (initial value)  
5
Setting range  
0, 5  
Size  
Advanced  
Full capacity (logical drive)  
64 KB  
WRBACK  
Full capacity  
2/4/8/16/32/64/128  
WRTHRU  
Stripe Size  
Write Policy  
WRBACK  
Read Policy  
Cache Policy  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
READAHEAD  
ADAPTIVE  
DirectIO  
CacheIO  
CANSPAN (YES)  
NOSPAN (NO)  
DirectIO  
YES  
Span  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-46  
– To open the "Advanced" sub menu screen from the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen, select "Advanced  
Menu" and then press Enter. Press Esc to move to the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen. In this case, the  
cursor moves to "Accept."  
– When creating SPANNING OF RAID5 system, set logical drive size to full capacity. SPAN setting is  
disabled when the logical drive size is changed.  
5. Fix the settings.  
After settings explained in 6 are completed, select "Accept" in the "Logical Drive X" screen and then press  
Enter to fix the settings. When settings are fixed, logical drive display in the "Logical Drive Configured"  
screen changes from green (not fixed) to light blue (fixed). The display color for the drive reveals whether a  
setting is fixed or not.  
To change the determined settings, press Esc to display the "Save Configuration?" screen and select "No."  
Start over from "New Configuration."  
6. Save the settings.  
After fixing the settings in 5, press Esc or Enter. The "Save Configuration?" screen appears.  
Select "YES" and press Enter.  
After saving is completed, a pop-up window displays a save completion message. Press any key to return to  
the "Configure" screen. This completes the SPANNING OF RAID5 logical drive creation procedure.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform "Initialize" and "Check Consistency" after logical  
drive creation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-47  
Others  
1. Select Adapter.  
This menu item appears only if more than one MegaRAID host adapter is installed in the computer. Each  
configuration is executed in increments of controller. Number of adapter is defined by PCI slot location.  
2. Clear Configuration.  
Clears configuration information.  
Select "Configure" → "Clear Configuration" from the TOP menu.  
All configuration information on the disk array controller and hard disks is cleared when this function is  
executed.  
Configuration information on all channels of the disk array controller is also cleared with this function.  
NOTES:  
„
When configuration information on the disk array controller and the hard disk do not  
match (excluding at replacement of faulty disk array controller), configuration cannot  
be performed by selecting the configuration information on the disk array controller. In  
this case, perform "Clear Configuration" to create configuration again.  
„
MegaRAID Configuration Utility cannot delete each logical drive. Use Power Console  
Plus.  
3. Make Online.  
Puts a hard disk in the FAIL status online.  
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk) → "Make Online" from the TOP menu.  
4. Battery  
– Indicate battery information  
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Battery Information" from the top menu.  
Backup Module  
PRESENT  
ABSENT  
PRESENT  
ABSENT  
GOOD  
Battery Pack  
Temperature  
HIGH  
Voltage  
GOOD  
LOW  
Fast Charging  
COMPLETED  
IN_PROGRESS  
***  
No of Cycle  
– Clear battery charge counter  
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Reset Battery Charge Counter" from the top menu. Popup message  
appears. Select "Yes" and press Enter.  
NOTES:  
„
„
Clear Battery Charge Counter when you exchange the battery.  
The battery backup module must be replaced every two years or 500 times of charge  
and discharge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-48  
5. Rebuild Rate  
Sets rebuild rate.  
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Rebuild Rate" from the TOP menu.  
Can be set in a range from 0% to 100%. The default value (recommended setting value) is "30%."  
6. Hard disk information  
Checks hard disk information.  
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select disk) → "View Drive Information" from the TOP menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-49  
REMOTE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION  
Remote Management Function enables your system to monitor the status of power supply unit, fan and temperature of  
servers by BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) and a remote KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) console feature by  
communicating through a management LAN PORT feature.  
NOTE: The screen which can be displayed by the remote KVM side becomes resolution  
1024x768 and less than refresh rate 75Hz.  
Since a screen is not displayed by remote PC when a setup beyond this is performed, please  
set it as less than this.  
Moreover, if many numbers of colours of a screen are set up, an exact colour may be unable  
to be displayed by remote PC.  
When your server is connected to the network where broadcasting occurs frequently, the  
performance about remote control may be affected.  
Default Network Settings  
When linking the management LAN port at the rear of the server to a network, refer to the following for default  
settings.  
IP Address : 192.168.1.1  
User Name : administrator  
Password  
: (None)  
Host Name : ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX  
„ Using a DHCP function, the host name in the case of performing automatic registration to a DNS server turns  
into the above-mentioned host name.  
Host Name: ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX, where the 12 Xs are the MAC address of the Management Card.  
„ When you link without a DHCP server, please access the above-mentioned IP address in the local network  
which can use a default IP address "192.168.1.1."  
NOTE: For security reasons, change these default settings (Password, an IP address, host  
name) by your network environment. See "BMC Configuration" described later for the  
setting method.  
Server Setup  
This section explains the operations which must be carried out on the server side, when using the Remote Management  
Feature.  
Initial Setup  
To use the Web server feature, change settings as shown below.  
Start the EXPRESSBUILDER from CD-ROM, and select [System Management] → [Set Advanced Remote  
Management Card] from the Tools menu.  
On the [Set Advanced Remote Management Card], select [Remote Management Console] → [Enabled], and then select  
[Register].  
IMPORTANT: For security, the Web server feature of BMC is disabled at the shipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-50  
Setting of Graphics Accelerator Driver  
„ When your server's operating system is Windows  
Use the driver which is installed at initial setup by Express Setup or system update.  
„ When a server's operating system is Linux  
Since it may be automatic and a setup of a monitor/Driver/video memory may not be able to be performed by  
composition when operating system is Linux. We recommend you to use it in text mode.  
Setting of Mouse Properties  
Clear the "Enhance pointer precision" check box in "Motion" in "Pointer Options" in "Mouse properties", when the  
server operating system is Windows Server 2003.  
Please adjust "Select a pointer speed", when you cannot move a mouse pointer up to the bottom right side of the host  
server screen via the remote KVM console.  
Configuring Management PC  
This section provides information on what you need to do for management PCs and requirements of the browsers to  
establish connection.  
Setting Your Browser  
Make the following settings.  
„ Enable SSL.  
Supported Browsers  
The following browsers are supported.  
„ Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0  
„ Netscape 7.0  
„ Mozilla 1.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-51  
Java2 Runtime Environment  
Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later, which you can download from the following, is  
required.  
http://java.sun.com/j2se/  
If you access the login page without installing the product mentioned above, you may see a dialog box for security  
warning. Read the message and take actions according to the message.  
Using Remote Management Console  
Overview  
You can control power-on/off of a server and use Remote KVM Console from a web browser by using the web server  
functions of BMC.  
This function is achieved through Java Applet.  
Connecting to the Web Server from a Web Browser on the Management PC  
Access the following URL from the web browser in the management PC.  
URL: http://BMC_HostPort/index.htm  
NOTES:  
„
"BMC_HostPort" is a colon and port number added after the BMC address or host name.  
If the http port number is 80h (default), you can skip the port number.  
„
When you use DHCP functions as well as performing auto registration to the DNS  
server, the BMC default name is "ARMC"+MAC Address.  
There is the MAC address on the Management Main Card.  
IP address: 192.168.1.1  
Default host name  
User name: Administrator  
Password : (none)  
Host name: ARMC00004C9FXXXX  
„
If you want to use the Remote Management Function with DHCP disabled, first use the  
default IP address "192.168.1.1" and make access in a local network where this IP  
address is available, and then adjust configurations such as IP address according to your  
network environment. For information on configuration, see "BMC Configuration"  
described later in this section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-52  
When you use the Remote Management Function for the first time, you may see a dialogue box for security warning as  
shown below. Read the message well and click either "Yes" or "Always." If you are not sure about the information,  
select "No."  
NOTE: When a connection is done with SSL, you may see some dialogue boxes for  
security warning.  
Login and Logout  
Login  
When the login page appears, enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].  
If you are logging in for the first time, use the following default user name and password.  
Default user name: administrator  
Default password: None (enter no information)  
IMPORTANT: Because no password is set by default, make sure to configure a password  
immediately after you log in.  
For security reasons, it is recommended to change the default user name as well.  
For information on configuration and modification, see "BMC Configuration" described  
later in this section.  
When the password you entered is authorized, the following licensing agreement appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-53  
Read the information well and click "Yes" If you cannot agree, click "No", and you will return to the login window.  
Logout  
To log out, select "Exit" on the File menu.  
When you log out, the main window closes and the login window for the browser appears.  
Main Window  
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
File menu  
The File menu allows you to quit this applet.  
Window menu  
The Window menu allows you to open various windows including Remote KVM Console window.  
Main frame  
Various windows open here.  
Help menu  
With the Help menu, you can check the version of the Remote Management Console.  
Control Panel  
You can use Control Panel to see server status and to control power-on/off.  
Control Panel also starts up various windows including Remote KVM Console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-54  
Functions of Control Panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11 12 13  
14  
15  
16  
17 18 19  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shows the BMC host name.  
Shows the server LCD.  
Server power lamp that shows the server power-supply status.  
Server power switch (provides the same function as achieved by pressing the server POWER switch)  
Forcefully powers off the server.  
Forcefully resets the server.  
Starts up Remote KVM Console.  
Starts up BMC Configuration.  
Starts up Firmware Update.  
10 Displays a user name.  
11 Indicates status of connection with BMC.  
12 Indicates status of communication security.  
13 Indicates network access status.  
14 Server status lamp that shows server status.  
15 Makes the server collect memory dump (provides the same functionality as achieved by pressing the DUMP  
switch in the server.)  
16 Makes the server unit ID lamp flash.  
17 Opens the window to show system event logs (SEL.)  
18 Opens the window to show sensor data records (SDR).  
19 Opens the window to show field replaceable unit (FRU) information.  
20 Hides Control Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-55  
Remote KVM Console  
By using Remote KVM Console functions of BMC, you can transfer local console of a server to the browser in the  
management PC over network.  
You can make full access from the management PC to the server by using video, keyboard and mouse.  
NOTES:  
„
The following five types of resolution are supported for a server.  
– 1024×768  
– 800×600  
– 640×480  
– 720×400  
– 720×350  
„
„
KVM is an acronym for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse.  
Unlike using a conventional serial console remotely, KVM allows you to remotely use  
graphics as they are.  
The remote KVM console cannot be used for connection via proxy.  
Starting Up Remote KVM Console  
When you click [ ], the icon to start up Remote KVM Console, on Control Panel, the Remote KVM Console window  
opens.  
IMPORTANT: Never open Remote KVM Console if you have logged in BMC of the  
local server from the local console of a server. Otherwise entry by keyboard or mouse  
becomes disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-56  
Names of Components in the Remote KVM Console Window  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
1, 2, 3, 4 Special key icon  
5
6
7
8
9
Screen refresh icon  
KVM properties icon  
Zoom in icon  
Zoom out icon  
Default size icon  
10 Window resize icon  
11 KVM indicator  
12 Remote KVM Console screen  
IMPORTANT: When pressing Shift + CapsLock on the remote KVM console, the  
indication may not be the same as the CapsLock LED on the management PC. In addition,  
the CapsLock status on the management PC may change after the remote KVM console has  
been used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-57  
Entry via Special Keys  
For special keys, even if you press these keys in a remote keyboard, it will not take effect in the host server. Using the  
following three special key icons will take effect in the host server.  
(raised state) and  
(raised state) and  
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.  
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.  
IMPORTANT: For example, to enter "Ctrl + Alt + Del", press the [CtrlAlt] icon and  
press Delete on your keyboard. By doing so "Ctrl + Alt + Del" takes effect in the host  
server. When this takes effect, click the [CtrlAlt] icon again to release the effect of entry of  
this special key. If you press Delete on the keyboard while the [CtrlAlt] icon has been  
selected, "Ctrl + Alt + Del" also takes effect in the host server.  
(Windows key icon)  
("|" pipe key icon)  
Zoom In and Zoom Out  
When you click [ ] to zoom in, what is shown becomes larger.  
When you click [ ] to zoom out, what is shown becomes smaller.  
When you click [ ], the default size icon, what is displayed will be the same size as the host server.  
When you click [ ], the window resize icon, the size of the Remote KVM Console window is adjusted to the remote  
screen size.  
Screen Refresh  
When you click [ ], the screen refresh icon, the Remote KVM Console screen will be refreshed. When the screen  
display is disturbed, refresh the screen.  
Modifying Properties  
When you click [ ], the KVM properties icon, the KVM properties window appears. In this window, you can specify  
the screen refresh interval which is executed automatically.  
NOTE: By having a shorter refresh interval, garbage on the screen will be reduced.  
However, note that screen refresh will give burden. A too short refresh interval can slow  
response speed of terminals or affect traffic performance of the network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-58  
IPMI Information  
You can see system event logs (SEL), sensor data records (SDR), and field replaceable units (FRU) information, which  
are called IPMI information. By using the IPMI information, you can see and examine troubles and events on the host  
server, and determine a part to be replaced.  
Displaying System Event Logs (SEL)  
When you click [ ] to display system event logs (SEL) on Control Panel, SEL information is loaded from BMC, and  
the following window showing system event logs (SEL) opens.  
On the upper part of the window, a list of logs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the  
entry selected from the list appears.  
When you click [ ] for reloading, the SEL information is reloaded from BMC, and you can update the information to  
latest.  
Clearing SEL Information  
You can clear the SEL information on BMC by clicking [ ], the icon for SEL clearing. When you see the message for  
confirmation, click [Yes] if you want to clear SEL. If not, click [No] so that SEL clearing will not be performed.  
Displaying Sensor Data Records (SDR)  
When you click [ ] to display sensor data records on Control Panel, SDR information is loaded from BMC, and the  
following window showing sensor data records appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-59  
On the upper part of the window, a list of sensor data records appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed  
information of the entry selected from the list appears.  
NOTE: SDR information is information on definitions for each sensor on the server.  
BMC monitors server sensors according to this information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-60  
Displaying Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Information  
When you click [ ] to display field replaceable units (FRU) information on Control Panel, FRU information is loaded  
from BMC, and the following window showing field replaceable units (FRU) information appears.  
On the upper part of the window, a list of FRUs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the  
entry selected from the list appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-61  
BMC Configuration  
You can configure BMC settings.  
Starting Up the BMC Configuration Window  
When you click [ ], the icon to start up BMC Configuration on Control Panel, the BMC Configuration window  
appears as shown below.  
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Loads a file  
Saves the file  
Edits information  
Reloads from BMC  
Makes global settings of BMC  
Item selection tree  
Currently configured values  
NOTE: Use "Global settings of BMC" when configuration information is loaded from a  
file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-62  
User Configuration  
By clicking [User Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, a list to show 20 accounts opens  
in the right pane and you can set up user accounts.  
Choose the account you want to modify or add and click [ ] to edit information. The User Configuration window to  
edit a user account as shown below opens.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Enter a user name.  
Enter a password. To avoid a mistake, enter the password in the two boxes.  
Configure an access privilege.  
Level :  
Administrator: the user is allowed to do all operations.  
User:  
the user can see information but is not allowed modify settings.  
Remote KVM Console: Specify whether or not to enable Remote KVM Console.  
If you select this check box, you can make Remote KVM Console enabled (permit)  
settings.  
NOTE: You can make settings of Remote KVM Console regardless of the access privilege  
levels. You can make "disable" settings for Administrator and "enable" settings for User.  
When you click [OK], all the information in the User Configuration window will be written into BMC.  
When you click [Cancel], the User Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-63  
Network Configuration  
By clicking [Network Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as  
shown below and you can make network-related settings for BMC including IP address.  
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Network Configuration window as shown  
below appears.  
The Network Configuration window has three tabs.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
The MAC address owned by BMC appears in this box.  
Choose whether or not to acquire an IP address automatically by DHCP.  
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire an IP address, make settings here.  
If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.  
IMPORTANT: When you change the IP address, the current connection will be  
disconnected after you click OK and settings of BMC is completed.  
Close the window once, and then enter the IP address (or host name) that has been newly  
configured in the browser to log in.  
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by  
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-64  
1
2
1
2
Choose whether or not to acquire the IP address of the DNS server automatically by  
DHCP.  
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire the IP address of the DNS server, make  
settings here. If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
The default host name to be used when no host name is configured for using DHCP  
Enter the host name of BMC. If nothing is set here, the default host name in the previous  
step will be used.  
3
4
Enter the domain name of the network to which BMC belongs.  
Choose whether or not to register the host name to the DNS server.  
NOTE: It is recommended to specify a name that is easy to imagine the host name in the  
server operating system (for Windows, a computer name) for a BMC host name.  
For example, if the host name on the server operating system is "sapphire", you may set  
BMC "sapphire_bmc" for a BMC host name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-65  
IMPORTANT: Because BMC uses a LAN controller independent of the server operating  
system, a BMC host name and a domain name cannot be exactly the same as those on the  
server operating system. If BMC belongs to a different network domain, you can have the  
same host name.  
When you click [OK], all the information in the Network Configuration window with three tabs will be written into  
BMC.  
When you click [Cancel], the Network Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured.  
HTTP Configuration  
By clicking [HTTP Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as shown  
below and you can make web server-related settings for BMC such as HTTP port.  
IMPORTANT: If you change the settings of HTTP port number, Enable SSL, or SSL Port  
Number, the current connection will be disconnected.  
Close the window once, and then enter the port number that has been newly configured in  
the browser to log in.  
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by  
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-66  
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the HTTP Configuration window as shown  
below appears.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
Specify an HTTP port number  
Choose enable/disable SSL communication. If you select this check box, you can make SSL  
enabled settings. And, if you clear this check box, you can make SSL disabled settings.  
NOTE: Unless there is any specific reason such use of SSL not being allowed, it is  
recommended to use the HTTPS protocol, which is encrypted.  
By default, SSL is disabled.  
3
4
Specify an SSL port number in this box.  
In Login attempt period, specify a time period during which you can retry login if your attempt  
to log in has failed.  
5
6
In Failed login attempts, specify the number of login attempts during the period specified in  
the previous step, exceeding which prompts to deny login as specified in the following step.  
In Account lock period, enter a time period during which login is denied.  
NOTE: The three configuration items mentioned above are effective to deny unauthorized  
login accesses that are attempted automatically. However, they cannot prevent such  
accesses completely.  
When you click [Default], default values for HTTP port number, SSL port number, Login attempt interval, Login  
attempts, and Account lock interval appear. But, SSL Enable/Disable check box is not changed.  
When you click [OK], all the information in the HTTP Configuration window will be written into BMC.  
When you click [Cancel], the HTTP Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-67  
Alert Mail Configuration  
By clicking [Alert Main Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as  
shown below and you can make alert mail-related settings.  
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Alert Mail Configuration window as shown  
below appears. The Alert Mail Configuration window has four tabs.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
You can choose to enable or disable alert mail functions. If you select this check box, you  
can make mail-related settings.  
Specify an alert level from six levels.  
Alert levels are categorized according to severity of event causing an alert.  
You can send a test mail by clicking the button in this box.  
IMPORTANT: If you want to send a test mail, complete all alert mail settings detailed in  
the following pages.  
Note that entering information in the Alert Mail Configuration window does not complete  
settings. When you have entered all the information you need to enter, click [OK], and the  
information will be written into BMC and settings will be completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-68  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Specify email addresses of alert mail. You can specify up to four addresses.  
Specify the sender’s email address.  
Type in the subject of the alert mail.  
Type in a message that appears in the message body of all alert mails. If you do not need  
such message, you can clear the check box. If you click "Acquire default message", the  
recommended message appears.  
NOTE: The subject and message you configure here will be attached to all alert mails.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-69  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Specify the SMTP server address. You can use the IP address as well.  
Specify the port number of the SMTP server.  
Specify how many retries can be made when attempt to send the mail has failed.  
Specify a retry interval that waits for the next retry when attempt to send the mail has failed.  
When you click [Default], default values for SMTP port number, retry count, and retry interval appear. Unless there is  
any specific reason not to, it is recommended to use the default values.  
1
2
1
Specify information to be included in the body of alert mails.  
Product Information  
IP Address  
The product name, code and number of the server  
IP address of BMC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-70  
Event Time  
The time the event occurred  
SEL Dump Data  
BMC URL  
Data representing system event logs (SEL) in hexadecimal  
URL of the ARMC login page  
BMC FQDN  
LCD Message  
BMC FW Rev.  
Full domain name of BMC  
LCD message in the server at the time of event occurrence  
Revision information of BMC firmware/SDR/PIA  
2
The information here will appear in the Date field in the header of alert mails.  
Firmware Update  
You can update applet, KVM firmware, BMC firmware, sensor data records (SDR), and platform information (PIA)  
Starting the Firmware Update Window  
When you click [ ], the icon to start Firmware Update, on Control Panel, revision information is loaded from BMC,  
and the Firmware Update window as shown below appears.  
When you click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes without any changes made.  
The following pages provide information about update procedures.  
Loading Update Data Files  
When you click [ ] to add update files, a window as shown below opens prompting you to select files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-71  
Select update data files.  
When you click [Open] after selecting files, loading of the files begins.  
It will take a little while for loading to be completed.  
NOTE: Because update can be made globally for each update target, make sure to load  
everything you need.  
You can specify multiple files to be loaded simultaneously.  
Checking Revisions  
When loading of data files is completed, the current revision and new revisions appear with information on files (file  
names and time stamps) in the Firmware Update window.  
Check the revisions and information.  
NOTE: Check each revision well because downgrade can be performed as well.  
If you click [ ] to clear update data, all data that has been loaded will be discarded. If you  
click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes discarding all information that has  
been loaded.  
Selecting Update Target  
Select update targets in the Update check boxes.  
NOTE: Only what you specify here will be written into BMC.  
Data will not be written for those items with file loaded but not specified here.  
IMPORTANT: If you want to update both SDR and PIA, perform writing simultaneously.  
If you update SDR and PIA separately, the first update data will be cleared when the second  
update is performed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-72  
Writing Update Data into BMC  
When you click [ ], update data will be written into BMC.  
For each update target, the window showing update progress appears.  
If any error is detected during update, an error message appears and the update is terminated.  
Completion of Writing  
When writing is completed, results appear in the [Status] column per [Target].  
OK  
OK  
OK  
NOTES:  
„
„
„
For targets other than applet, reboot the server or power off and then on the server to  
apply the update.  
If you reboot the server or power on the server to apply the BMC firmware update,  
connection to BMC is disconnected. To continue using, log in again.  
To apply applet update, log out and shut down all browsers, and then log in again. You  
do not need to reboot the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-73  
Troubleshooting  
Error messages  
Fatal errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
2
Fatal error. JavaVM quits.  
Try logging in again.  
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.  
Try logging in again.  
A fatal software error has  
occurred.  
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.  
Login error  
No  
Error Message  
Authentication error  
What to do  
1
Check the user name and password, and then enter them again.  
Access privilege error  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Unauthorized operation. You Try performing the operation with administrator’s privileges. Consult your  
have no privilege to perform administrator.  
the operation.  
Network errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
The HTTP communication  
failed.  
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service  
representative if the error persists.  
2
3
4
5
Could not resolve the IP  
address.  
Unable to reach the target  
host.  
Check the network environment.  
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.  
Check the network environment.  
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.  
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service  
representative if the error persists.  
Check the network environment and try again.  
A network error occurred.  
Failed to download applet.  
When SSL has been enabled, more than one client cannot connect to the  
network simultaneously. Try again after a connection from other client is  
finished.  
Contact your service representative if the error persists.  
6
7
The RMCP+ session is  
closed.  
Failed to establish the  
RMCP+ session.  
Check the network environment.  
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.  
Check the network environment.  
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.  
8
The RMCP+ transmission  
failed.  
Check the network environment.  
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.  
9
The specified RMCP+  
Check the network environment.  
protocol cannot be used.  
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.  
10  
BMC resources to establish  
a new RMCP+ session are  
insufficient.  
Try again after a connection from other client is finished.  
11  
The RMCP+ session  
time-out occurred.  
Check the network environment and server.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
BMC-related errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
The IPMI request was  
aborted.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
2
3
Received bad response from  
BMC.  
BMC does not support IPMI  
2.0 functions.  
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-74  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
4
Failed to run the IPMI  
command.  
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
5
6
7
Failed to send the IPMI  
message.  
Illegal IPMI message was  
requested.  
Specified target is not present. Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
Check the network environment.  
If the network has no problem, contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
Remote KVM Console errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Failed to disable Remote KVM  
Console.  
Check the network environment and try again.  
Contact your service representative if the error persists.  
2
3
Failed to enable Remote KVM  
Console.  
KVM packet transmission failed.  
Check the network environment and try again.  
Contact your service representative if the error persists.  
Check the network environment and server.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
4
5
The KVM request was aborted.  
UDP packet transmission failed.  
This is not a problem. Click OK and close the message box.  
Check the network environment and server.  
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.  
6
7
Remote KVM console can not  
activate because it is disabled.  
Make a remote KVM console enable.  
See "Remote KVM Console" in Chapter 4.  
Try again after the client has finished using Remote KVM Console.  
Remote KVM Console is used by  
other client.  
8
Failed to shut down Remote KVM  
Console.  
Use Remote KVM Console after waiting 3 or more minutes.  
9
Failed to make settings.  
Check the network environment and try again.  
Contact your service representative if the error persists.  
10  
The UDP connection is closed.  
Check the network environment and server.  
If you do not find any problem, contact your service representative.  
System event logs (SEL) display errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Failed to clear session event logs  
of BMC.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
2
Failed to acquire system event  
logs.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Sensor data records (SDR) display error  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Failed to acquire sensor data  
records.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Field replaceable unit (FRU) information display error  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Failed to acquire field replaceable  
units information.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
BMC configuration errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
Failed to make settings:  
Check the network environment and try again.  
Contact your service representative if the error persists.  
2
3
4
Failed to acquire BMC  
Configuration:  
Used by other software program.  
Try again after a while.  
Try again after a while.  
Invalid BMC configuration file.  
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-75  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
5
The required XML tag is not  
found.  
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.  
6
7
Failed to write the file.  
The BMC configuration file is not saved successfully. Change the  
location to save the file and try again.  
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and  
Invalid user name  
underscore (_) for a user name. A user name should be 32 characters or  
less.  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
The user name is too long  
The password is too long.  
Passwords are not matched.  
Invalid HTTP port number  
Invalid SSL port number  
A user name should be 32 characters or less.  
Use 16 or less characters.  
Again, input passwords.  
You can use only numeric values.  
You can use only numeric values.  
HTTP/SSL should not be the  
same.  
The same port number cannot do them. Specify different value.  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Invalid login attempt period  
Invalid failed login attempts  
Invalid account lock period  
Invalid IP address  
You can use only numeric values.  
You can use only numeric values.  
You can use only numeric values.  
Use numerals and periods to specify an IP address.  
Use numerals and periods to specify a subnet mask.  
Use numerals and periods to specify a default gateway.  
Use numerals and periods to specify the IP address of DNS server.  
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and  
underscore (_) for a host name. A host name should be 64 characters or  
less.  
Invalid subnet mask  
Invalid default gateway  
Invalid DNS server IP address  
Invalid host name  
22  
23  
Invalid domain name  
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and  
underscore (_) for a domain name. A domain name should be up to 256  
characters.  
The SMTP server address is too  
long.  
Specify within 256 characters.  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Invalid SMTP port number.  
Invalid retry count  
Invalid retry interval  
"To" is too long.  
You can use only numeric values.  
You can use only numeric values.  
You can use only numeric values.  
Specify within 256 characters.  
Specify within 256 characters.  
Specify within 512 characters.  
The message should be up to 4064 characters.  
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.  
The specified file may be corrupted.  
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
"From" is too long.  
"Subject" is too long.  
The message is too long.  
Failed to open the file:  
Failed to close the file:  
Can’t open the file:  
Timeout has occurred.  
Firmware update errors  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
1
There are uncompleted update  
images on BMC as follows:  
Reboot the server and complete the update.  
2
Failed to acquire status of the  
update area.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
3
4
Update data is too large:  
Failed to prepare update  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
5
6
Invalid file size:  
Could not find the revision  
information:  
The update file may be corrupted. Acquire the update file again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
7
8
9
Failed to create rollback image.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Failed to erase.  
Unsupported format version:  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-76  
No  
Error Message  
What to do  
10  
Failed to load the update image  
file.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Update has failed.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Some update files may be corrupted.  
Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted.  
Acquire update files again.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Some update files may be corrupted.  
Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted.  
Acquire update files again.  
Could not switch to the update  
mode.  
Could not find the update targets:  
Invalid address:  
Writing has failed.  
Unsupported token is detected:  
Invalid segment information:  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
Invalid data length:  
Failed to open the file:  
Failed to close the file:  
Invalid file checksum:  
Failed to parse files.  
Failed to parse files:  
Failed to load files:  
Could not find files:  
Failed to verify  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.  
The specified file may be corrupted.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative  
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
27  
28  
29  
Update will be stopped because  
interruption has occurred.  
Online update is now being used.  
Check clients. A software program other than you are using may have  
interrupted.  
Try again as necessary after online update performed by other tool is  
completed.  
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.  
Failed to acquire the current  
revision.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Failed to acquire lines:  
Invalid line length:  
Unexpected EOF is detected:  
Unexpected token is detected:  
PIA does not suit this server.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.  
It is not Platform Information (PIA) of this server. Acquire update files  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-77  
CONFIGURING I/O BOARD JUMPERS  
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server against  
access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may want clear them. The following  
describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.  
IMPORTANT: Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.  
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the I/O board of the server.  
The following describe the clearing procedure.  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described  
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as  
malfunctions of the server.  
1. Record the current BIOS settings.  
2. Power off the server and unplug the power cord.  
3. Remove the rear access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).  
4. Remove the processor access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).  
5. Change the desired jumper switch setting.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause the server to fail or  
malfunction.  
„
„
Use the clip over jumper pins (pins 1 and 2) on the I/O board.  
Do not lose the clip.  
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.  
Pins for protecting/clearing  
the passwords.  
Jumper clip  
Pins for  
protecting/clearing the  
CMOS data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-78  
„ Pins for protecting/clearing the passwords  
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the passwords.  
Open these two pins to protect the passwords (factory-set).  
„ Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data  
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the CMOS data.  
Open these two pins to protect the CMOS data (factory-set).  
6. Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.  
7. When the POST screen appears, power off the server and unplug the power cord.  
8. Restore the jumper switch setting.  
NOTE: Place the clip over the jumper pins 11 and 12 after use to keep the pin. Placing the  
clip over any other pins may cause malfunction of the server.  
Pins 11 and 12  
9. Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.  
10. Run BIOS setup utility and restore the parameter settings recorded in Step 1.  
If you have cleared the password, set it again as needed.  
11. Save and exit the utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to  
the server.  
„ Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003  
To use the server with another operating system than described in this section, contact your service representative.  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by  
using the BIOS set up utility "SETUP." See Chapter 4 for detail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-2  
About Express Setup  
"Express Setup" contained in your EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM is intended for initial setup of the server. Its  
automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and  
providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies  
RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.  
IMPORTANT: Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the hard disk.  
For Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 and Windows® 2000, Express Setup automatically configures your server and  
installs the operating system. After a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to remove the  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the  
license agreement.  
For the other operating systems, Express Setup initializes the target disk(s), creates the maintenance partition, and  
installs the various maintenance utilities from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to lead your server to ready-to-install  
for the desired operating system.  
You can also use "Configuration disk" at "Express Setup" in order to save or backup parameters for installation.  
The Configuration disk is able to have has some parameter files that include the configuration information for the server  
setup.  
If you want to set up the server as before, execute the Express Setup with the parameter file you have saved before.  
NOTES:  
„
„
The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system.  
If you want to create a parameters file, have a blank floppy disk (MS-DOS 1.44 MB  
format) ready.  
„
„
If you want to use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk for Mass Storage Device"  
that ships with optional boards, a parameters file is mandatory.  
You can create a parameters file in advance using "Configuration Diskette Creator"  
included in EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003  
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 in the server. Read instruction  
in this section before proceeding the installation.  
NOTES:  
„
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server™ x64 Editions. If  
you want to install it, see Appendix D.  
„
If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup, see Appendix E.  
Installation Notice  
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install  
Windows Server 2003 correctly.  
Supported operating system on this model  
The server supports the following edition:  
„ Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition  
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)  
„ Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition  
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)  
On installing other operating system, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.  
BIOS Specification  
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct. See Chapter 4 to  
specify them.  
ESMPRO Agent  
ESMPRO Agent requires installing the necras.sys driver on your Windows system.  
If you install the Windows without using the Express Setup, run the Update Express5800 system in Master Control  
Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
Optional Board Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:  
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards except ones listed below by using a driver  
floppy disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing  
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.  
„ Supporting installation of operating system in EXPRESSBUILDER  
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)  
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)  
„ Other optional boards  
– Initio 101 SCSI Controller  
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller  
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1 Disk Controller  
IMPORTANT: If you want to set up for the SecuRAID 321, you cannot use "Express  
Setup". See Appendix E, and set it up.  
Windows Server 2003  
Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note the following issue:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding the optional device  
and the setup of Express server mainframe (BIOS and optional board specification)  
„
A document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached to the other software  
package which is sold separately, but refer to this document when you install Windows  
Server 2003 on this model.  
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems" described later to  
specify the settings for trouble recovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".  
Installing on the Mirrored Volume  
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk Management", invalid the  
mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk, and valid the mirroring again after the  
installation has completed.  
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer Management".  
Connecting MO Device  
If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected, the installation may not be completed normally.  
In such case, disconnect the MO device and then re-install the system from the beginning.  
Media such as DAT  
During the operating system installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for operating system installation to the  
system, such as DAT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
Connecting Hard Disk  
Connect the hard disk that operating system is not going to be installed on after installing the operating system.  
NOTE: If you connect the N8103-81F board as a data disk, clear disk array controller's  
configuration information before you perform the Express Setup. The process for clearing  
configuration information is described in the manual attached to the N8103-81F board.  
Creating Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 2900 MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5  
Dump File Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the  
dump file in the boot drive is required.  
It may not be possible to collect correct debug information due to virtual memory  
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set a paging file size large enough for  
the entire system.  
„
„
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the  
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.  
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is  
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition  
to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as  
follows:  
2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4192 MB + Application Size  
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept  
remained.  
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix E to re-install the system.  
About maintenance partition (the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")  
The maintenance partition for server maintenance is reserved in the head of Hard Disk Drive (a partition of  
approximately 55 MB). This area is for saving some maintenance utilities. Do not delete the maintenance partition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
Setup Flow  
This section visually describes Express Setup setup flow.  
: Process that proceeds automatically  
: Process that needs to input or select  
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?  
Yes  
Read notes and restrictions  
No  
Confirmed  
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive  
Confirmed  
Confirmed  
New File  
(Select Setup Parameter File)  
Existing File  
Check Setup Parameter File  
Correct  
Skipped  
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting  
Confirmed  
Disk Array Configuration Screen  
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities  
Operating System Installation Menu  
Create the OS partition after the reboot  
Confirm Setup File Create New File  
Select OS to install  
No Floppy Disk  
In case [Skip] is selected  
Confirm the specification and input the value  
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM  
Copying NEC Modules  
from the Drive  
Insert Windows CD-ROM  
Agree Software License Agreement  
Install OS Automatically  
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules  
↓
Log on Automatically  
After restarting the computer, the  
installation is completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
Installing Windows Server 2003  
Express Setup proceeds to the setup by specifying the necessary information in the wizard. You can also save the setup  
information created in the wizard on a floppy disk as a setup file.  
NOTE: One floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44 MB is necessary to save the setup  
information. Please prepare a floppy disk by yourself before the installation.  
Using the same setup file you saved and used before allows you to omit specifying the  
setup information in the wizard.  
And if you use a floppy disk which is attached to the optional device such as disk array  
controller and contains device driver to install optional mass storage driver while  
processing the Express Setup, you have to save the setup information in the setup file.  
Please prepare one empty floppy disk for setup file in this case, too.  
1. Turn the power of peripheral devices on, and then turn on the server.  
NOTES:  
„
If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with an MO device connected, the  
installation may not be completed normally. In such case, detach the MO device and  
then re-install the system from the beginning.  
„
„
Connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed to after  
installing operating system.  
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Reinstalling the operation  
system when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix E).  
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may  
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
4. Click [Express Setup].  
5. The message, "Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Express Server or Workstation",  
will be displayed.  
If you use the setup parameter file, click [Yes] and if you do not use the setup parameter file, click [No].  
6. "Note" will be displayed. Read the instruction carefully and click [Confirm].  
7. Notes and restrictions are displayed.  
Read the messages carefully and click [Confirm].  
NOTE: If some operating system has already been installed on the hard disk, a message  
asking if you want to continue the installation appears.  
If you wish to continue the installation, click [Continue].  
8. If you selected "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the server.  
If not, go to next step.  
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the floppy disk from the  
server until the message as removing the floppy disk appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-8  
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]  
The parameters files in the floppy disk are listed in dialogue-box.  
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup, and then click [Use].  
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify the Setup File  
parameters?" appears.  
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click [Skip].  
Click [Review] → Go to next step.  
Click [Skip] → Go to step 10.  
[Using a blank disk]  
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.  
The dialog box appears.  
2) Type the file name and click [Use].  
9. Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.  
[Configure RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and then click [OK].  
NOTE: Choose RAID0 when you install it in one hard disk.  
When the dialogue-box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID configuration, creating  
Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.  
10. Select the installing Operating system.  
Select "Windows" from the menu.  
11. Select the Windows family.  
Select "Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise  
edition" category.  
NOTE: If you selected "Skip" at step 8, this menu does not appear, go to step 13.  
12. Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary, and then click [Next].  
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] to continue. Modify the parameters each time necessary.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Reserve the partition to install the operating system more than the minimally required  
size.  
„
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration", the  
information included in the first partition (excluding maintenance partition) will all be  
formatted and deleted. The information included in the other partition will be retained.  
The figure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when  
maintenance partition exists.  
First Partition  
<Maintenance Partition>  
Retained  
Second  
Partition  
Deleted  
Third  
Partition  
Retained Retained  
Fourth  
Partition  
„
You cannot re-install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID  
Configuration".  
„
„
If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Partition", it is necessary to  
convert to NTFS.  
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is selected but the  
partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does not exist (excluding  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
maintenance partition), Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk  
to install Windows Server 2003.  
„
„
You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.  
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the specified contents of the  
former screen and require to go back to modify the specification.  
„
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows Server 2003 is to be  
installed appears. The first 55 MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that is  
used to store the configuration information or utilities unique of the server. We do not  
recommend to delete this area, but if you do not want to reserve this 55 MB area,  
perform the installation by manual setup. It is not possible to delete this area by  
Express Setup.  
NOTES:  
„
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will go back to select  
the operating system. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic Information] screen.  
„
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup automatically selects default  
value for the later specification to continue the installation.  
13. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.  
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver  
into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to perform the installation.  
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is attached to the  
system.  
14. Remove EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive according to the message.  
If you proceed to the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.  
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.  
15. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not agree, click [I  
disagree] or press F3.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003  
will not be installed.  
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install, the window to  
specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" pops up on the first  
logon. Specify the appropriate value.  
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers  
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information about the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test, etc.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and  
enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to use these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC5\PROSET\WS03XP32  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
Network Driver  
Specifying the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode  
need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
1. Click Start menu, then [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and finally [Local Area Connection].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, [Settings] and then [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from the drop-down menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
3. Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver with the same process as above.  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network  
and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network  
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network  
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For  
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described  
later in this chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-12  
Optional Network Board Driver (INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT PCI / INTEL PRO/1000 F 64-BIT  
PCI / 64B PCI-X PRO 1000MT DUAL)  
If you want to use an optional Network Board, the network driver will be installed automatically.  
Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.  
IMPORTANT: If you want to use optional Network Board INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT  
PCI, open [Advanced] in PROSet window and change [Offload TCP Segmentation] value  
to "Off".  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)  
If you use SCSI controller driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer  
Management].  
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]"  
and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, enter "a:\"  
into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When Initio 101 board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When Adaptec 29320 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1)  
If you use SCSI controller driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1), update your system with EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM attached to your system.  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)  
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and  
install the driver as follows:  
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].  
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a suitable driver for my  
device (Recommended)], and click [Next].  
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server 2003  
OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].  
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].  
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box  
appears; click [Complete].  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically. The following is the procedure  
when it is necessary to install manually.  
If you want to use optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install the  
driver.  
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.  
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation.  
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.  
5. Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions and  
restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14  
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File.  
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.  
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:  
„ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721  
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini files"  
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4 GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in Boot.ini file will enable  
the system to be installed with over 4 GB of memory.  
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.  
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.  
„ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988  
"A description of the 4 GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch"  
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.  
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].  
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].  
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].  
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].  
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.  
<Example of Boot.ini file>  
[boot loader]  
timeout=30  
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS  
[operating systems]  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server  
2003, Standard" /fastdetect  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server  
2003, Standard, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE  
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons  
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.  
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating system" drop-down list  
box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you can make your system start automatically  
from the switch you specified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-15  
Setting for Solving Problems  
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as  
possible when it should occur.  
Memory Dump (Debug Information)  
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the server.  
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump  
„
„
The staff of your maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory  
dump. Customers need only to specify the memory dump.  
If any trouble occurs after specifying the process below, the message to inform that the  
system is in short of virtual memory may appear, but continue to start the system. If  
you re-start the system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to specify.  
1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].  
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.  
2. Select [Advanced] tab.  
3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.  
IMPORTANT:  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
„
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is  
recommended.  
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot  
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.  
„
„
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity  
mounted on Express server + 1 MB".  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the  
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The  
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding  
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory  
dump) write destination drive.  
Windows Server 2003  
„
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is  
recommended.  
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot  
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.  
„
„
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity  
mounted on Express server + 12 MB".  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the  
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The  
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding  
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory  
dump) write destination drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16  
4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the  
[Write debugging information] group box.  
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".  
D:\MEMORY.DMP  
5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.  
The [Performance Options] window appears.  
6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.  
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.  
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to a value larger than [Recommended],  
and click [Set].  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug  
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the  
dump file in the boot drive is required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory  
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough  
for the entire system.  
„
„
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition Size to be Created"  
described earlier.  
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit the new memory  
size.  
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we recommend you to press  
dump switch to confirm that the dump will be collected normally in advance.  
9. Click [OK].  
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In such case, follow  
the message to restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-17  
Windows Dr. Watson  
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr. Watson diagnoses the  
server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic  
information.  
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.  
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].  
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.  
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.  
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".  
NOTE: You cannot specify network path. Specify the path on local computer.  
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.  
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger.  
5. Check the following check boxes on the [Option] box.  
† Dump Symbol Table  
† Dump All Thread Contexts  
† Add To Existing Log File  
† Create Crash Dump File  
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.  
6. Click [OK].  
Network Monitor  
Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage network troubles. To use Network Monitor, you need to  
restart the system after the installation has completed, we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network  
trouble may occur.  
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].  
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].  
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.  
4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click [Next].  
5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive and click  
[OK].  
6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.  
7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.  
8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.  
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network Monitor]. For information  
on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18  
Installing Maintenance Utilities  
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See Chapter 6 for installing the  
utilities to your server or management workstations.  
Updating the System  
Update the system in the situation below:  
„ Processor is expanded (expanded from single processor to multi-processor).  
„ Modified system configuration.  
„ Recovered the system using recovery process.  
Log on to the system with an account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and insert the  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update Express5800 System]  
from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the setup process.  
Making Backup Copies of System Information  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
Exceptional Setup  
This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as follows. The detailed  
information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device.  
Installation of Mass Storage Device not Supported by ExpressSetup  
If you would like to install or re-install the operating system when the system has new mass storage device not  
supported by EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.  
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.  
2. If the mass storage device is a disk array controller, configure the RAID system before running  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
3. Boot the system from EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
4. (a) When the Disk Array Configuration dialog box appears, check "Use Existing Array".  
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".  
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.  
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.  
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to the on-screen messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-20  
This page is intentionally left blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Installing and Using Utilities  
This section describes how to use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your server and to install the  
utilities stored on the EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6-2  
EXPRESSBUILDER  
EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of installing and  
configuring your server. Shipped with all our servers, the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provides a flexible, guided  
installation process for system administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows 2000 or  
other operating systems (contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems).  
NOTE: Before using EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup, complete the hardware  
configuration.  
EXPRESSBUILDER includes three distinct programs. Two can be booted under DOS for initial setup, and one is for  
use under Windows operating system.  
„ DOS-based with local console  
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the server and to  
install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the system drive.  
„ DOS-based with remote console  
Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over the network or via  
COM B (serial) port.  
NOTE: No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
„ Windows-based  
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft Windows system  
(Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install the several applications and read the  
documentation from the menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with local console.  
Starting EXPRESSBUILDER  
The following procedure instructs you to start EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM while  
EXPRESSBUILDER is running.  
1. Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.  
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the CD-ROM drive of your server.  
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may  
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
Express Setup  
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through  
the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and  
configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the  
desired operating system.  
If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, after a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to  
remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and  
acknowledge the license agreement.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system and, therefore,  
Express Setup clears the contents of the hard disk.  
„
When the setup is started, do not turn off the server until the setup is completed, and  
also make sure not to remove the "Configuration Diskette" from the floppy disk drive  
until the message that allow you to remove it appeared.  
Tools  
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than Express Setup and  
permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic  
utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the various BIOS programs.  
Tools Menu  
RAID Board: Present  
Total Drives: 1  
Drives in Group: 1  
Hot Spares: 1  
RAID Level: 7  
Write Mode: WRITE_THRU  
Maint Part: Present  
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
System Diagnostics  
Create Support Disk  
Setup Maintenance Partition  
BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
System Management  
Help  
Return to the Top Menu  
„ Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or restored from the  
floppy disk.  
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information on the disk array controller is saved into the floppy disk. If you set or  
change RAID, always use this function to save the configuration information into a floppy disk.  
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard disk on the disk  
array controller.  
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the configuration information.  
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on the hard disk must  
be saved into the disk array controller.  
However, if the configuration information on the new disk array controller is saved into a hard disk, use  
this function to restore the configuration information.  
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In that case,  
this menu will not be shown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program that performs  
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help for details.  
„ System Diagnostics  
System Diagnostics runs various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if  
the connection between the server and additional board is normal.  
After the System Diagnostics is run, a system check program assigned to each model starts. See Chapter 7 for  
details.  
„ Create Support Disk  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities that you can put on floppy  
disks and load onto your system.  
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. If your system  
has Windows operating system, you may find it more convenient to use EXPRESSBUILDER for  
Windows-based to make support disks  
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the future. Customers are  
to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.  
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Windows Server 2003  
Enterprise Edition. (No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express  
Setup.)  
– Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server. (This  
disk is used for Windows 2000 clean installation and for Recovery for Windows 2000 system.) (No need  
to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)  
– ROM-DOS Startup FD  
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.  
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
– System Management FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the System Management.  
„ Setup Maintenance Partition  
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk. About 55 MB of  
the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and executable commands.  
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and update the utilities. The  
maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are system diagnostics, System Management, and  
Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If the processing is  
discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.  
„
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from the operating  
system. In order to retain the Configuration Data, do not delete the partition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
NOTES:  
„
„
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated again.  
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items do not appear.  
– Create Maintenance Partition  
EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55 MB of the maintenance partition on the system disk (or disk array  
system) as work area. The various utilities are installed when the maintenance partition is created  
successfully or when the maintenance partition is already created.  
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities  
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.  
– Maintenance Partition Update  
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This menu is only used  
when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or attached with your system.  
– FDISK  
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions, etc.  
„ BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
This menu allows you to update software modules such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the  
update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from our customer service representative.  
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk, and the various  
BIOS and firmware programs are updated.  
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program is running. If the  
update processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.  
„ System Management  
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control and alert.  
„ Help  
Displays explanations about various functions of EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Return to the Top Menu  
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with remote console.  
EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set up the server from  
the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the server's COM2 (serial) port.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or on any other server  
obtained without EXPRESSBUILDER. Doing so may cause a failure of the server.  
„
When a keyboard is connected to the server, the remote console feature is disabled.  
EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console. (Nothing is displayed  
on the management PC.)  
Starting  
The following two methods are available to start the server.  
„ Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN  
„ Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection (COM2)  
For the procedure for starting EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console, see "DianaScope".  
IMPORTANT: Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS SETUP.  
EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the CD-ROM drive is not the first device to launch  
the system.  
To use this feature, you need a 3.5-inch floppy disk. Please prepare a floppy disk.  
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as shown below.  
„
„
LAN Controller 1 (10/100): [Enabled]  
Serial Port A:  
Base I/O address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[3F8]  
[IRQ 4]  
„
Serial Port B:  
Base I/O address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[2F8]  
[IRQ 3]  
„
„
„
„
Serial Port Address:  
Baud Rate:  
[On-board COM B]  
[19.2k]  
Flow Control:  
Console Type:  
[CTS/RTS]  
[PC ANSI]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
Top Menu  
Shown below are the top menu items.  
„ Setup  
Automatically sets up the server.  
„ Tools  
Launch the features of EXPRESSBUILDER individually.  
„ Help  
Help message on EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Quit  
Quit EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Setup  
The EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array and maintenance partition are  
automatically configured.  
Tools  
When you select the [Tools] on the Top Menu, the following screen appears.  
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section "EXPRESSBUILDER for  
DOS-Based with Local Console" are displayed. See the previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)  
The Master Control Menu is used to,  
„ Read the User's Guide or the other documents,  
„ Update the Express5800 system, and  
„ Install the management software.  
NOTES:  
„
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or Windows NT 4.0  
(or later).  
„
Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the Adobe Reader to view or  
print these documents.  
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically. If the CD-ROM Autorun function is invalid in your system,  
run the \MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly.  
Some items are greyed-out if the logon user does not have the administrator authority or the item is not proper for the  
system.  
To use Master Control Menu,  
„ Click [Online Document],[Setup] or [Quit], or  
„ Click the right mouse button on the Master Control Menu window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for configuring the server with  
the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).  
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette Creator to run the setup,  
you can setup from the installation of operating system to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to  
confirm the specification. Also, you can install the system with the same specification as before when re-installing the  
system. We recommend you to create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT: You can not create [Configuration Diskette] for Microsoft® Windows  
Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.  
NOTE: You can install Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 without [Configuration  
Diskette]. Also, you can modify/newly create [Configuration Diskette] during the setup  
with EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Creating Configuration Diskette  
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for operating system installation and creating  
[Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.  
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when installing Trekking  
command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette Creator].  
1. Start the operating system.  
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu will appear.  
3. Right-click on the screen or left-click [Software Setup]. The menu will appear.  
4. Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].  
Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
5. Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.  
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
6. Specify each item and click [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic Information] dialog  
box.  
7. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].  
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information] dialog box will appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
8. Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked and type the file name for the Setup File in  
[File Name].  
9. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].  
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when you install Windows  
Server 2003 or Windows 2000. Put a label and keep it in a safe place.  
NOTE: For information on the contents of each item, refer to the Online Help.  
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information files] on  
Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install an optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by Express Setup, follow the procedure below to create  
[Configuration Diskette]:  
1. Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.  
2. From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].  
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
3. Specify each item and click [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk Environment] dialog  
box.  
4. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].  
NOTE: If you click [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
5. When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage device].  
6. When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check  
box is checked and input file name for the Setup File in [File Name].  
7. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-15  
ESMPRO  
ESMPRO (referred to as ESMPRO hereafter) lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network.  
ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and performance. With log data collected by  
ESMPRO, a system administrator can track long-term and short-term performance, monitor server usage, create graphs  
to record trends, and check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected to create more  
efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage.  
Functions and Features  
ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network. These features help the  
system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and transfer tasks. Some features of ESMPRO  
Manager include:  
„ Hardware and software server configuration  
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the processor, memory, disks, disk arrays, and LAN  
boards.  
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each server.  
„ Server failures  
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type, location, cause, and  
suggested corrective action.  
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature, memory failure,  
crashes, and software failure information.  
„ Performance  
– ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information,  
such as the rate of processor load, memory usage, disk usage, and LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can  
help the system administrator monitor and prevent server overloads.  
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on ESMPRO, refer to the online document in the  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
Supplement  
Note the following in addition to the NOTE that has been described to the online document for ESMPRO.  
„ Indication on ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add/Remove Memory  
If you add or remove a memory board dynamically by using hot-add/remove feature, the added or removed  
memory size will not be indicated correctly on Data Viewer of ESMPRO Manager unless the system is  
rebooted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-16  
DianaScope  
DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the Express5800 series.  
See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of DianaScope.  
NOTES:  
„
One server license is required for each server to be managed remotely by using  
DianaScope.  
„
Please contact your service representative in order to purchase this accessory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17  
Power Console Plus  
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g.,  
monitoring and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local Express servers and Express servers  
connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on graphical screens without the system being  
stopped.  
Major Functions  
Power Console Plus has the following features:  
„ Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration  
„ Enabling the change of RAID levels  
„ Being compatible with SAF-TE  
„ Supporting the performance monitor  
„ Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and fan monitoring  
„ Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive  
„ Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration  
„ Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate  
Components  
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:  
„ SNMP Agent  
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.  
„ MegaRAID Service Monitor  
This function enables ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs. Install  
MegaRAID Service Monitor in the Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted.  
„ MegaRAID Client  
This function controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the Express server  
in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that is connected through the Express  
server and network.  
„ MegaRAID Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in the Express server  
in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.  
„ MegaRAID Registration Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of Express servers and  
management PCs that are connected through network. The above components must be installed correctly for  
establishing the environment to use Power Console Plus.  
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and management PC.  
„ Server:  
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted  
Install the following two components in this server:  
– MegaRAID Service Monitor  
– MegaRAID Client  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18  
„ Management PC:  
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)  
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0 Terminal Server  
Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component. Management PC does not guarantee operation  
on Client, which used Terminal Server, Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.  
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after powering on the machines where "Server" and  
"Management Server" are installed.  
Install the following component in this PC:  
– MegaRAID Client  
„ Management server:  
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs  
Install the following components in one of the servers or management PCs:  
– MegaRAID Server  
– MegaRAID Registration Server  
Server Setup  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a server.  
„ Hardware  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk:  
10 MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-19  
Management PC Setup  
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network (TCP/IP).  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a management PC.  
„ Hardware  
– Machine:  
Express5800 series  
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a processor at least equivalent to it)  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk:  
10 MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20  
BMC ONLINE UPDATE  
The BMC firmware is updated with the BMC Firmware file.  
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the DC power during while updating the BMC Firmware.  
The updated BMC firmware becomes valid after restarting the system.  
Hardware Requirement  
„ Hard disk drive  
2MB  
„ Supported operating systems:  
Windows® 2000 Server  
Windows® 2000 Advanced Server  
Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition  
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition  
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux ES 3  
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux AS 3  
Installation  
Windows Server 2003 / Windows 2000  
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu of EXPRESSBUILDER starts automatically.  
2. Select [BMC Online Update].  
BMC Online Update installer starts. Follow the installer instructions to install.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-21  
Linux  
1. Copy the following file in the suitable directory from CD-ROM.  
cp /mnt/cdrom/BMCTOOL/OnlineUp/BmcOnlineUpdate.i386.  
2. Expand the rpm file.  
rpm –ivh BmcOnlineUpdate.i386  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-22  
Startup  
Windows Server 2003  
Select [All Programs] → [BmcOnlineUpdate] → [BmcOnlineUpdate].  
Windows 2000  
Click [Programs] → [BmcOnlineUpdate] → [BmcOnlineUpdate].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-23  
Linux  
Enter the following command to start the program.  
cd /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate  
./BmcOnlineUpdate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-24  
Uninstallation  
Windows Server 2003  
1. Select [All Programs] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs].  
2. Click [BmcOnlineUpdate].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-25  
Windows 2000  
1. Select [Setting] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs].  
2. Click [BmcOnlineUpdate].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-26  
Linux  
1. Enter the following command to remove the file.  
rm /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate/*  
2. Enter the following command to remove the directory.  
rmdir /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate  
Error Messages  
Message  
Action  
Update isn't necessary.  
Illegal data.  
The firmware is in up-to-date state.  
The data is not for the target device.  
Update the firmware with the data of the target device.  
BMC information can't be acquired.  
Check if the remote management card is correctly installed.  
Update the firmware after making sure that the card is  
correctly installed.  
Cannot enter the online mode.  
Failed to save the current data.  
Cannot enter the update mode.  
BMC is possibly in Busy state.  
Try again several minutes later.  
An error was occurred while data is  
being updated.  
Termination process failed.  
The IPMI Driver not found.  
BMC is not supported.  
Install the IPMI driver.  
The BMC does not support the update function. Updating  
by this tool is unavailable.  
If updating still fails, contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Maintenance  
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES  
It is recommended that you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on a regular  
basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, contact your service representative.  
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System Information Management"  
and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information.  
ALSO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE DISK ARRAY CONFIGURATION  
DATA IF YOUR SYSTEM IS IN THE ARRAY CONFIGURATION. WHEN  
YOUR HARD DISKS HAVE BEEN AUTO-REBUILT DUE TO A FAILURE, IT  
IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE  
CONFIGURATION DATA. TO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE  
CONFIGURATION DATA, USE THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY THAT IS  
RESIDENT IN THE FLASH MEMORY ON THE OPTIONAL DISK ARRAY  
CONTROLLER BOARD. REFER TO THE MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH THE  
BOARDCLEANING  
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the serer in a good shape.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Disconnect the power plug before cleaning with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
High temperature  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7-2  
Cleaning the Server  
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the procedure below if stains  
remain on the surfaces:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
To avoid altering the material and colour of the server, do not use volatile solvents such  
as thinner and benzene to clean the server.  
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of server, and the  
inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.  
1. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
2. Unplug the power cord of the server from the power outlet.  
3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.  
4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.  
5. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.  
6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, and wipe the server with it once again.  
7. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.  
8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.  
Cleaning the Interior  
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of the interior of the  
server, especially around the I/O board.  
Dust build-up inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a build-up can prevent  
proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server components. Also, dust may contain conductive or  
corrosive materials that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts.  
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is located. For most office  
environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months. For more severe environments, clean the interior  
every 6 months.  
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover. You will need a  
small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection), computer grade canned air, and a small  
brush for cleaning the interior.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.  
WARNING  
Unplug all power cords.  
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present inside the server  
and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage is removed only when the power  
cord is unplugged.  
1. Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.  
2. Remove the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
3. Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the I/O board.  
4. Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the I/O board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
5. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the interior of the server.  
6. Reinstall the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
7. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.  
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse  
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER lamp goes off), and then wipe the  
keyboard surface with a dry cloth.  
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the mouse ball clean,  
use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly:  
1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and cotton swabs.  
2. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counter clockwise to remove it.  
4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and turn your hand holding  
the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward). The mouse ball is released onto your palm.  
Mouse ball  
Mouse ball cover  
Roller  
Bottom View  
5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.  
6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in Step 5.  
7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.  
8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe stains slowly and  
carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.  
9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.  
10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.  
11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
Cleaning CD-ROM  
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:  
1. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit).  
2. Press the Open/Close button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out.  
3. Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.  
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.  
4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing so may damage the  
lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.  
5. Press the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front to close the tray.  
6. Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD-ROMs from the centre to the outside. Use CD-ROM cleaner  
only if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner  
causes damage to the CD-ROM contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server  
may cause failure.  
NG  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS  
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.  
Use the System Diagnostics program in EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to diagnose the server.  
Test Items  
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.  
„ Memory  
„ Processor cache memory  
„ Hard disk used as a system  
IMPORTANT: When running the System Diagnostics, make sure to remove the LAN  
cable. When running the System Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected, the network  
may be influenced.  
NOTE: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.  
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics  
There are two ways to diagnose the server: using the local console (keyboard) of the server itself, and using the  
management PC via serial port (remote console).  
IMPORTANT: Two methods (LAN and serial port) are mentioned in the Chapter 6  
"EXPRESSBUILDER" as the way of communicating in remote console. Use the serial port  
to run System Diagnostics with remote console. The LAN connection is not for System  
Diagnostics.  
Start the diagnostics program as follows:  
1. Shutdown the operating system, and turn off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.  
2. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.  
3. Plug the power cord and turn on the server.  
4. Use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server.  
See Chapter 6 "EXPRESSBUILDER" for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
The following menu appears when starting the server using the EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Local console  
Remote console  
5. Select [Tools].  
6. Select [System Diagnostics].  
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes.  
When the diagnosis completes, the display changes as shown in the figure below.  
Diagnosis tool title  
Test windows title  
TeDoLi(TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00(Build020901.1.1m)  
Test result  
Test End  
Start10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00  
Test End : NormalEnd  
03  
AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00  
<System>  
MEM  
CACHE  
<SCSI>  
Memory  
Cache  
16 count  
49 count  
NormalEnd  
NormalEnd  
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W  
89 count  
NormalEnd  
[Enter] Detail Information  
[ESC] Return to Enduser Menu  
Guide line  
Test window  
Diagnosis tool title: shows a name of this diagnosis and version information.  
Test windows title: shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes, it shows "Test End"  
Test Result:  
shows the information including time of start, end and progress, and result of the  
diagnosis.  
Guide line:  
shows a description of keys to navigate the window.  
Test window:  
Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis.  
If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "Abnormal End" in red colour.  
Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis where the error occurred. Take a note of the error message  
showed, and contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
7. Follow the Guide line shown at the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End user Menu shown  
below.  
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)  
Enduser Menu  
<Test Result>  
<Device List>  
<Log Info>  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.  
<Test Result> shows the diagnosis completed screen aforementioned.  
<Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected.  
<Log Info>  
shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis. It can be saved to a floppy  
disk. To save the log information to a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk in a floppy  
disk drive and select <Save[F]>.  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
change where to output log  
Restarts the Express Server.  
8. Select <Reboot> in the End user Menu above.  
The Express Server restarts and EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system.  
9. Exit EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.  
10. Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.  
11. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.  
12. Plug the power code.  
This completes the System Diagnostics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8  
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER  
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to  
a power source.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If the server needs to be relocated or stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great  
extent, contact your service representative.  
„
„
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk, if any.  
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks when relocating the server if it contains  
any.  
„
It is recommended that the server and the internal devices should be stored in a place  
where the room temperature can be maintained. It is important for the server or internal  
devices to work normally after storage. Store the device in a place where temperature  
ranges between -10 to 55ºC and humidity ranges between 20 to 80% without dew  
condensation.  
„
If you use the server after transported or relocated, check the system timer and adjust it  
if necessary. If the system timer advances or delays remarkably with the passage of time,  
contact your service representative to repair it. The server or internal option device may  
be dewed if it is brought to a warm place from a cold place suddenly. Using a server or  
an internal device with dew attached may cause malfunction or failure. Make sure to  
adapt them to the operating environment before using them.  
1. Take floppy disk and CD-ROM out of the server, if any.  
2. Power off the server (the POWER lamp goes off).  
3. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
4. Remove all the cables from the server.  
5. Hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons to carry the server.  
6. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Troubleshooting  
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.  
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is recommended to install the  
Off-line Maintenance Utility, ESMPRO, on the server and client computers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8-2  
SYSTEM VIEWERS  
Monitor the occurrence of fault by ESMPRO during system operation.  
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to ESMPRO Manager on the language PC. Check whether any  
alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of ESMPRO Manager.  
[Example]  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
LAMPS  
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications.  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp  
POWER/SLEEP lamp  
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered. When the server is  
off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep mode). If the operating  
system supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2000, pressing the SLEEP switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP  
lamp in green and place the server in the power-saving mode. Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP  
lamp and place the server back in the normal mode.  
The power-saving mode is only available when the operating system supports the power-saving feature. Some operating  
systems allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is made to the server  
for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.  
STATUS Lamp  
The STATUS lamp stays lit green when the server is in successful operation. When the STATUS lamp is unlit, flashing  
green or lit/flashing amber, it indicates that the server has failed.  
The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actions to take.  
NOTES:  
„
If the server has ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility installed, you can view the  
System Event Log (SEL) to identify the cause of a trouble.  
„
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the operating system and reboot  
it, if available. If the shutdown from the operating system is not available, reset or  
execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the power cord to reboot the  
server.  
STATUS lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4  
STATUS lamp  
indication  
Description  
Action  
Flashing green  
Contact your service representative.  
The server is in operation with its  
processor degraded.  
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor  
Settings] to identify the degraded processor and replace it  
as soon as possible.  
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor  
Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes], and then select [Exit] -  
[Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.  
Contact your service representative.  
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory  
Configuration] to identify the degraded memory (DIMM) and  
replace it as soon as possible.  
The server is in operation with its  
memory degraded.  
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory  
Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes], and then select  
[Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.  
The system can continue operation if the status lamp  
flashes green. However, consult with your service  
representative.  
A correctable memory or bus  
error was detected.  
Unlit  
The server is powered off.  
POST is in progress.  
Power on the server.  
Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp will light in a few  
seconds after POST completion.  
A processor error occurred  
(IERR).  
Cycle power to the server. If POST displays an error  
message, take a note on the message and contact your  
service representative.  
A processor thermal error was  
detected. (Thermal-Trip)  
A watchdog timer has timed out.  
A PCI system error occurred.  
A PCI parity error occurred.  
An uncorrectable memory error  
was detected.  
An uncorrectable bus error was  
detected.  
POST terminates with error.  
Memory dumping is requested.  
A thermal error (critical) was  
detected.  
Wait until memory dumping completes.  
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that  
the fans are firmly connected.  
Lit amber  
If this error indication persists, contact your service  
representative.  
A voltage error (critical) was  
detected.  
Contact your service representative.  
A power supply(ies) failed to  
operate.  
Contact your service representative.  
Flashing  
amber  
A power alarm was detected in a Identify the failed power supply unit and contact your  
power supply unit.  
service representative.  
A fan alarm was detected.  
Make sure that the fan units are firmly connected.  
If this error indication persists, contact your service  
representative.  
A thermal error (warning) was  
detected.  
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that  
the fan units are firmly connected.  
If this error indication persists, contact your service  
representative.  
A voltage error (warning) was  
detected.  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
DISK ACCESS Lamp  
The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay.  
This lamp lights green every time any of such hard disk is accessed.  
When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit amber, it indicates that a hard disk error occurred. To identify a failed hard disk,  
see the lamps provided for each hard disk.  
When the DISK ACCESS lamp flashes green or amber alternately, the hard disk drive connected to an internal disk  
array controller is under rebuilding.  
DISK ACCESS lamp  
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp  
The LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN. The lamp blinks while the server is  
accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission). The value next to the icon indicates the number of the network  
port on the rear panel.  
LAN1 ACCESS lamp  
LAN2 ACCESS lamp  
UID Lamp  
The UID is located on the front and rear panel of the server. Pressing the UID switch on the front panel turns UID lamp  
blue, and allows you to locate the server you are working on. Use this switch when several servers are installed in the  
system.  
Pressing the UID switch again turns off the UID lamp.  
You can make ESMPRO Manager, DianaScope, or the remote management feature of Web server to flash the UID lamp.  
When you finished working, turn off the UID lamp.  
UID switch  
UID lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
Attention Lamp  
Attention lamp  
The Attention lamp lights amber when location where an error occurred cannot be identified automatically or errors  
occurred in two or more locations. Check the error log to identify the location.  
Processor Board Error Lamp  
Two processor board error lamps are located at the front and the rear of the server. These lamps light amber when an  
error occurs on the processor board. If the lamp lights, check the lamp indication on processorVRM error lamp in front  
of the processor board. The lamp being lit amber indicates that the relevant processor or VRM fails.  
Processor board error lamp  
Processor/VRM error lamps  
Processor board error lamp  
REAR  
FRONT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
Memory Board Error Lamp  
Memory board error lamp  
The memory board error lamp lights amber if an error occurs on memory board or on DIMM installed in memory board.  
Check the memory board Attention lamp being lit amber to identify the failed memory board.  
In addition, when you press the switch for DIMM slot error lamp on the failed memory board, the DIMM slot error  
lamp lights amber. Then, you can identify the slot containing the failed DIMM.  
DIMM slot error lamps  
Switch for DIMM slot error lamp  
Memory board  
Attention lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
I/O Board Error Lamp  
The front I/O board error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on I/O board or PCI board installed in your server.  
Check the lamp indication on the rear of the server.  
When the rear I/O board lamp lights amber, the I/O board may be failed. When any of the PCI slot error lamps below  
the PCI slots light amber, the relevant PCI board or I/O board slot itself may be failed.  
I/O board error lamp  
I/O board error lamp  
PCI slot error lamps  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
Power Unit Error Lamp  
Power unit error lamp  
The Power unit error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the power supply unit.  
Check the power unit error lamp to identify the failed power supply unit.  
Power unit error lamps  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
Fan Error Lamp  
The fan error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the fan. Check the Fan Fault lamp being lit red to identify the  
failed fan (see "FAN Fault Lamps" described later).  
Fan error lamp  
Thermal Error Lamp  
Thermal error lamp  
The thermal error lamp lights amber when an abnormal temperature in the server is detected. Check the room  
temperature where the server is installed.  
Access Lamps  
The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive light when access is made to a media in the drive.  
ACCESS lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
Memory Board Lamps  
3
2
1
1
2
3
Memory board POWER lamp  
Lights green during power-on. Flashes green during rebuilding (e.g., memory board is hot-added).  
Memory board Attention lamp  
Lights amber when an error occurred on memory board or DIMM.  
Memory board Redundancy lamp  
Lights green in memory mirroring or memory RAID configuration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp)  
The disk lamp on the 3.5-inch disk bay has different meanings depending on the display status.  
DISK lamps  
„ Lit green  
The hard disk is installed and powered on.  
„ Blinking green  
Indicates that the hard disk is accessed.  
„ Lit amber  
Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration.  
NOTE: While hard disks are in the disk array configuration (RAID1/RAID5 or RAID0+1),  
a single failed hard disk does not affect the operation of the server. However, it is  
recommended to replace the failed hard disk and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disks  
as soon as possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk.)  
„ Alternate lighting green or amber  
Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the defected hard disk is replaced  
with a new one in the disk array configuration, the data is automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function). During  
the rebuild operation, the lamp is lit green or amber alternatively.  
The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes on amber if the rebuild fails.  
IMPORTANT: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such a case, restart the server,  
hot-swap the failed hard disk, and restart rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the  
auto-rebuild feature.  
„
„
„
Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before rebuilding hard disks,  
the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)  
When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk  
back again.  
Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
LAN Connector Lamps  
LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear panel have two lamps as follows.  
LINK/ACT lamp  
LAN port 2  
1000/100/10 lamp  
LAN port 1  
1000/100/10 lamp  
„ LINK/ACT lamp  
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server. If the power is  
supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other, the lamp is lit green  
(LINK state). If information is transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACT state).  
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection. If the lamp is not lit  
still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected. Contact your service representative.  
„ 1000/100/10 lamps  
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether the LAN2 port normally equipped with the server is operated  
through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the  
network port is operated through 1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through  
100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14  
PCI Slot Lamps  
PCI Slot  
Power Lamp  
PCI Slot  
Fault Lamp  
PCI Slot Power Lamp  
The PCI slot power lamp lights in green when a PCI board is installed in the slot and powered up.  
PCI Slot Fault Lamp  
This lamp is available only when the operating system is Windows 2003/2000.  
If the driver of a Hot Plug PCI board is stopped under Windows 2003/2000 and then the PCI board is logically  
disconnected from the system, PCI slot fault lamp blinks in amber.  
If an error occurred on a PCI board or the slot where is installed the PCI board, this lamp lights in amber.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
FAN Fault Lamps  
FAN Fault lamp is adjacent to each fan module. These lamps are triangular in shape and point to their respective fans.  
When the cooling fan is working normally, the lamp does not light. When a fan is not working normally, the lamp lights  
in red. A cooling fan failure is also indicated by the status lamp located on the front panel. The failed fan may be  
hot-swapped.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a fan that is normally operating. Ask your service  
representative for replacement of the cooling fan. If a cooling fan fails, do not continue to  
operate the system, but ask your service representative for replacement as soon as you can.  
FAN Fault lamp  
FAN Fault lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16  
ERROR MESSAGES  
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.  
Error Messages after Power-on  
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On Self-Test). When the POST  
detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit.  
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware failure, use of the  
keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing.  
„ Immediately after the server is powered  
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction (simultaneous key entry of Ctrl  
+ Alt + Delete)  
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an operating system instruction  
„ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST  
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to one of the above reason, restart the server once again. If the same  
error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure normal operation of the server, however,  
make sure to follow the following restrictions.  
„ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following  
the server power-on.  
„ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the SCSI Configuration  
Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before contacting your service  
representative. The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The following table lists error  
messages, descriptions, and actions to take.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service  
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.  
Error  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
code  
0200  
0210  
0211  
0212  
Failure Fixed Disk.  
Stuck Key.  
Keyboard error.  
Contact your service representative.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
• Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
• Restart the system. If the error cannot be corrected, contact  
Keyboard Controller Failed.  
your service representative.  
0213  
0220  
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.  
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error cannot be  
corrected in spite of the release of the lock, contact your service  
representative.  
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in spite of the  
start of SETUP, contact your service representative.  
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run  
SETUP.  
0230  
0231  
0232  
0250  
System RAM Failed at offset.  
Shadow RAM Failed at offset.  
Extended RAM Failed at address line.  
System battery is dead - Replace and run  
SETUP.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative to replace the battery. (After  
restarting the computer, start the SETUP to provide the setting  
again.)  
0251  
0252  
System CMOS checksum bad - Default  
configuration used.  
The default values have just been set. Start the SETUP to provide  
the setting again. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
The password has just been cleared. Start the SETUP to provide  
the setting again.  
Password checksum bad - Passwords  
cleared.  
0260  
0270  
0271  
0280  
System timer error.  
Real time clock error.  
Check date and time setting.  
Previous boot incomplete – Default  
configuration used  
Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the same error  
occurs successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service  
representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
02B0  
02B1  
Diskette drive A error.  
Diskette drive B error.  
Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" and "Legacy  
Floppy B" in the Main menu again. If the same error occurs  
successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service  
representative.  
02B2  
2B3  
02D0  
02D1  
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP.  
Incorrect Drive B type - run SETUP.  
System cache error - Cache disabled.  
Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error cannot  
be corrected, contact your service representative.  
The cache cannot be used. Contact your service representative.  
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching Contact your service representative.  
limit.  
02F5  
02F6  
02F7  
0500  
0501  
0502  
0503  
0504  
0505  
0506  
0507  
0508  
0611  
0613  
0614  
DMA Test Failed.  
Software NMI Failed.  
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 01  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 02  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 03  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 04  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 05  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 06  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 07  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 08  
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 09  
IDE configuration changed.  
COM A configuration changed.  
COM A config. error - device disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
0615  
0616  
0617  
0618  
0619  
061A  
0B00  
0B1B  
0B1C  
0B28  
COM B configuration changed.  
COM B config. error - device disabled.  
Floppy configuration changed.  
Floppy config. error - device disabled.  
Parallel port configuration changed.  
Parallel port config. error - device disabled.  
Rebooted during BIOS boot at Post Code.  
PCI System Error on Bus/Device/Function.  
PCI Parity Error on Bus/Device/Function.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 1.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 2.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 3.  
Unsupported Processor detected on  
Processor 4.  
Contact your service representative.  
Make sure that the server supports the processor. If you are  
not sure, contact your service representative to request the  
maintenance.  
0B29  
0B2A  
0B2B  
0B30  
0B31  
0B32  
0B33  
0B34  
0B35  
0B36  
0B37  
0B50  
0B51  
0B52  
0B53  
0B5F  
Fan 1 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 2 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 3 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 4 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 5 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 6 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 7 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 8 Alarm occurred.  
Processor #1 with error taken off line.  
Processor #2 with error taken offline.  
Processor #3 with error taken offline.  
Processor #4 with error taken offline.  
Forced to use Processor with error  
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service  
representative to request the maintenance.  
The processor is degraded. Contact your service  
representative.  
Because an error is detected in every processor, the system is  
forcibly started. Contact your service representative.  
0B60  
0B61  
0B62  
0B63  
0B64  
0B65  
0B66  
0B67  
0B70  
DIMM group #1 has been disabled  
DIMM group #2 has been disabled  
DIMM group #3 has been disabled  
DIMM group #4 has been disabled  
DIMM group #5 has been disabled  
DIMM group #6 has been disabled  
DIMM group #7 has been disabled  
DIMM group #8 has been disabled  
Contact your service representative.  
The error occurred during temperature sensor  
reading.  
0B71  
0B74  
System Temperature out of the range.  
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service  
representative to request the maintenance.  
Contact your service representative.  
The error occurred during voltage sensor  
reading.  
0B75  
0B78  
0B7C  
System voltage out of the range.  
The error occurred during fan sensor reading  
The error occurred during redundant power  
module confirmation  
Contact you service representative to replace the power supply  
unit.  
0B7D  
The normal operation can't be guaranteed  
with use of only one PSU  
Contact you service representative to add an additional power  
supply unit or replace the existing power supply unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
0B80  
0B81  
0B82  
0B83  
0B8A  
0B8B  
0B8C  
0B8D  
0B8E  
0B8F  
BMC Memory Test Failed.  
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.  
BMC core hardware failure.  
BMC IBF or OBF check failed.  
BMC SEL area full.  
BMC progress check timeout.  
BMC command access failed.  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC  
Parameter Error -  
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B90  
0B91  
0B92  
BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.  
BMC update firmware corrupted.  
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.  
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command  
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.  
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B93  
0B94  
BMC SDR Repository empty.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.  
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
All the functions other than the function of accessing to SMC  
through IPMB can be used. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the  
power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error  
cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.  
IPMB signal lines do not respond.  
0B95  
BMC FRU device failure.  
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command  
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.  
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B96  
0B97  
0B98  
0B99  
0B9A  
0B9B  
0B9C  
0B9D  
0B9E  
0B9F  
0BB0  
0BB1  
0BC0  
BMC SDR Repository failure.  
BMC SEL device failure.  
BMC RAM test error.  
BMC Fatal hardware error.  
BMC not responding.  
Private I2C bus not responding.  
BMC internal exception.  
BMC A/D timeout error.  
SDR repository corrupt.  
SEL corrupt.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
SMBIOS - SROM data read error.  
SMBIOS - SROM data checksum bad.  
POST detected startup failure of 1st  
Processor.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative to replace the processor.  
0BC1  
0BC2  
0BC3  
POST detected startup failure of 2nd  
Processor.  
POST detected startup failure of 3rd  
Processor.  
POST detected startup failure of 4th  
Processor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20  
Error  
code  
8120  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #1.  
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in  
the relevant group.  
8121  
8122  
8123  
8124  
8125  
8126  
8127  
8130  
8131  
8132  
8133  
8134  
8135  
8136  
8137  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #2.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #3.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #4.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #5.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #6.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #7.  
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM  
group #8.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #1.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #2.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #3.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #4.  
Msmatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #5.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #6.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #7.  
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM  
group #8.  
See the labels put on the DIMMs to make sure that the DIMMs of  
the same type are installed in groups. If DIMMs of different types  
are installed in one or more groups, contact the service  
representative to replace DIMMs properly.  
8140  
8141  
8142  
8143  
8144  
8145  
8146  
8147  
8150  
8151  
8160  
DIMM group #1 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #2 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #3 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #4 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #5 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #6 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #7 with error is enabled.  
DIMM group #8 with error is enabled.  
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper.  
Password Cleared By Jumper.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 1.  
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in  
the relevant group.  
Turn off the power. Then recover the jumper setting to the original  
setting.  
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact  
your service representative.  
8161  
8162  
8163  
8170  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 2.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 3.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 4.  
Processor 1 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-21  
Error  
code  
8171  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
Processor 2 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact  
your service representative.  
8172  
8173  
817F  
8200  
Processor 3 not operating at intended  
frequency  
Processor 4 not operating at intended  
frequency  
All processors not operating at intended  
frequency  
Online Spare Memory was not ready.  
DIMM type mismatch is detected when the online spare memory  
feature is enabled.  
Contact your service representative.  
8201  
Mirroring Memory was not ready.  
DIMM type mismatch is detected or unnecessary installation in  
group #2 is detected when the memory mirroring feature is  
enabled. Check the DIMM type or installation. If the error cannot  
be corrected, contact your service representative.  
Check if capacity, type, and installation status of all DIMMs are  
correct.  
8202  
8300  
Memory RAID was not ready.  
Secondary BIOS is corrupted.  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22  
The following figures show the location of specific components referenced in the POST error codes and messages table  
listed above.  
NOTE: Failed processors or memory boards can be also identified with the BIOS SETUP  
utility.  
„ Fans  
Fan 3  
Fan 6  
Fan 2  
Fan 8  
Fan 5  
Fan 1  
Fan 4  
Fan 7  
„ Processors  
Processor #3  
Processor #1  
Processor #2  
Processor #4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-23  
„ Memory board  
The DIMM group consists of four DIMM boards.  
DIMM #4  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #1  
Memory board slot #1 Memory board slot #2 Memory board slot #3 Memory board slot #4  
1
2
3
4
DIMM #1  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #4  
DIMM  
Group #1  
DIMM #1  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #4  
DIMM  
Group #3  
DIMM #1  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #4  
DIMM  
Group #5  
DIMM #1  
DIMM #2  
DIMM #3  
DIMM #4  
DIMM  
Group #7  
DIMM  
Group #2  
DIMM  
Group #4  
DIMM  
Group #6  
DIMM  
Group #8  
Beep Codes  
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.  
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the beep interval  
1-3-1-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 3 beeps, pause, 1 beeps, pause, and 3 beeps notifying that the keyboard controller error.  
Beep code  
1-2  
Description  
Video BIOS initialization  
error  
Option ROM initialization  
error  
Recommended action  
If nothing is displayed, check if the connector of the display unit is properly  
connected. If the error persists, contact your service representative to  
replace the I/O board.  
If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally installed PCI board is not  
displayed, check if the PCI board is properly installed. If the error persists,  
contact your service representative to replace the I/O board or PCI board.  
1-2  
1-3-1-3  
1-3-3-1  
Keyboard controller error  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again. If the error persists, contact  
your service representative to replace the I/O board.  
Check if the DIMM and memory boards are properly connected. If the error  
persists, contact your service representative to replace DIMM or memory  
board.  
Memory is not detected.  
Or, DIMM type is  
incorrect.  
1-3-4-1  
1-3-4-3  
DRAM Address error  
DRAM test Low Byte  
error  
1-4-1-1  
DRAM test High Byte  
error  
1-5-1-1  
1-5-2-2  
1-5-2-3  
Processor fails to start.  
No processor error  
Processors of various  
types and voltages  
coexist.  
Check if the processor is properly installed. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative to replace processor or processor board.  
Check if the additionally installed processor is supported by the server.  
Check also the installation of processor. If the error persists, contact your  
service representative to replace the processor or processor board.  
1-5-4-4  
2-2-3-1  
Power failure  
Internal board may be faulty. Contact your service representative to identify  
the faulty board and replace it with new one.  
Unexpected interrupt test Contact your service representative to replace the I/O board.  
error  
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is interrupted due to power  
failure or momentary voltage drop and the system is restarted. This is not an error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-24  
Error Messages on Virtual LCD  
The remote management feature of DianaScope and Web Server allows the managed server to display the virtual LCD  
(16 digits x 2 lines) and status lamps.  
The virtual LCD displays the followings:  
„ POST progress  
„ Error occurred during operation or DC OFF (AC power is being on)  
When POST detects an error, the POST error code is displayed on the virtual LCD upon completion of POST. See the  
table for POST error codes for details.  
POST Progress  
POST Progress Code  
Product ID  
System BIOS Version  
POWER ON  
ASF Code  
READY  
ASF Message  
POST Error Code  
POWER ON  
READY  
Other Messages  
POWER ON  
ATTENTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-25  
Messages displayed on upper line  
On-screen  
Description  
message  
Action  
Prepare To Boot  
POST completes normally.  
This is not an error.  
CPU Reconfigured  
POST completes with processor  
degraded.  
Contact your service representative.  
Try the following steps to cancel the error.  
1. Start BIOS SETUP.  
2. Select [Main] - Processor Settings] - [Processor  
Retest] - [Yes].  
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].  
Mem Reconfigured  
POST completes with memory degraded. Contact your service representative.  
Try the following steps to cancel the error.  
1. Start BIOS SETUP.  
2. Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] -  
[Memory Retest] - [Yes].  
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].  
M#1 D#1 C Err  
M#1 D#2 C Err  
M#1 D#3 C Err  
M#1 D#4 C Err  
M#2 D#1 C Err  
M#2 D#2 C Err  
M#2 D#3 C Err  
M#2 D#4 C Err  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #1 on memory board #1.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #2 on memory board #1.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #3 on memory board #1.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #4 on memory board #1.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #1 on memory board #2.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #2 on memory board #2.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #3 on memory board #2.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #4 on memory board #2.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
On-screen  
message  
Description  
Action  
M#3 D#1 C Err  
M#3 D#2 C Err  
M#3 D#3 C Err  
M#3 D#4 C Err  
M#4 D#1 C Err  
M#4 D#2 C Err  
M#4 D#3 C Err  
M#4 D#4 C Err  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #1 on memory board #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #2 on memory board #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #3 on memory board #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #4 on memory board #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #1 on memory board #4.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #2 on memory board #4.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #3 on memory board #4.  
A correctable error frequently occurs in  
DIMM #4 on memory board #4.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
M#1 D#1 UC Err  
M#1 D#2 UC Err  
M#1 D#3 UC Err  
M#1 D#4 UC Err  
M#2 D#1 UC Err  
M#2 D#2 UC Err  
M#2 D#3 UC Err  
M#3 D#4 UC Err  
M#3 D#1 UC Err  
M#3 D#2 UC Err  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1 The system can continue operation if the status lamp  
or DIMM #2 on memory board #1.  
flashes green. However, consult with your service  
representative.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3  
or DIMM #4 on memory board #1.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1  
or DIMM #2 on memory board #2.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3  
or DIMM #4 on memory board #2.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1  
or DIMM #2 on memory board #3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-26  
M#3 D#3 UC Err  
M#3 D#4 UC Err  
M#4 D#1 UC Err  
M#4 D#2 UC Err  
M#4 D#3 UC Err  
M#4 D#4 UC Err  
M#1 BD C ErrX  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3  
or DIMM #4 on memory board #3.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1  
or DIMM #2 on memory board #4.  
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3  
or DIMM #4 on memory board #4.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
memory board #1.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
M#2 BD C ErrX  
M#3 BD C ErrX  
M#4 BD C ErrX  
M#1 BD UC ErrX  
M#2 BD UC ErrX  
M#3 BD UC ErrX  
M#4 BD UC ErrX  
PROC BD C ErrX  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
memory board #2.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
memory board #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
memory board #4.  
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory The system can continue operation if the status lamp  
board #1.  
flashes green. However, consult with your service  
representative.  
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory  
board #2.  
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory  
board #3.  
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory  
board #4.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
processor board.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
PROC BD UC ErrX An uncorrectable error occurs on  
processor board.  
The system can continue operation if the status lamp  
flashes green. However, consult with your service  
representative.  
IO BD C ErrX  
IO BD UC Err1  
PCI S#3 C Err  
PCI S#4 C Err  
PCI S#5 C Err  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
I/O board.  
An uncorrectable error occurs on I/O  
board.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
PCI board slot #3.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
PCI board slot #4.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
Consult with your service representative.  
The system can continue operation. However,  
consult with your service representative.  
A correctable error frequently occurs on  
PCI board slot #5.  
PCI S#1 Err  
PCI S#2 Err  
PCI S#3 Err  
PCI S#4 Err  
PCI S#5 Err  
PCI S#6 Err  
PCI S#7 Err  
PCI S#8 Err  
PCI S#9 Err  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #1.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #2.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #3.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #4.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #5.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #6.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #7.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #8.  
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #9.  
Consult with your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-27  
Messages displayed on lower line  
On-screen message  
Proc Missing  
Description  
Processor is not found.  
Action  
Contact your service representative.  
240VA Power Down  
Power On Cnt Alm  
POWERGOOD dropped during power-on.  
POWERGOOD signal error occurred at  
power on/off.  
Proc1 VccpAlm XX  
Proc2 VccpAlm XX  
Proc3 VccpAlm XX  
Proc4 VccpAlm XX  
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor  
#1.  
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor  
#2.  
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor  
#3.  
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor  
#4.  
BB +3.3v Alm XX  
BB +3.3vs Alm XX  
BB +5.0v Alm XX  
BB +5.0vs Alm XX  
BB +12v Alm XX  
BB -12v Alm XX  
VBAT Alm XX  
BB +1.25v Alm XX  
BB +1.5v Alm XX  
BB +1.8v Alm XX  
BB VTT Alm XX  
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+3.3Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+5.0Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
-12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
Voltage alarm in lithium battery occurred.  
+1.25V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+1.5V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+1.8V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.  
+1.150V voltage alarm occurred on I/O  
board.  
VDD TNB Alm XX  
VCACHE1 Alm XX  
VCACHE2 Alm XX  
+1.500V voltage alarm occurred on  
processor board.  
VCACHE1 voltage alarm occurred on  
processor board.  
VCACHE2 voltage alarm occurred on  
processor board.  
Proc 1 T-Trip  
Proc 2 T-Trip  
Proc 3 T-Trip  
Proc 4 T-Trip  
Processor 1 IERR  
Processor 2 IERR  
Processor 3 IERR  
Processor 4 IERR  
SB1 +3.3v Alm XX  
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #1.  
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #2.  
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #3.  
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #4.  
IERR occurred on processor #1.  
IERR occurred on processor #2.  
IERR occurred on processor #3.  
IERR occurred on processor #4.  
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 1.  
SB1 +5.0v Alm XX  
SB1 +12v Alm XX  
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 1.  
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-28  
On-screen message  
Description  
Action  
SB2 +3.3v Alm XX  
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 2.  
Contact your service representative.  
SB2 +5.0v Alm XX  
SB2 +12v Alm XX  
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 2.  
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI  
backplane 2.  
SCSI A-1 Alm XX  
SCSI A-2 Alm XX  
SCSI A-3 Alm XX  
SCSI B-1 Alm XX  
SCSI B-2 Alm XX  
SCSI B-3 Alm XX  
Proc1 TempAlm XX  
Proc2 TempAlm XX  
Proc3 TempAlm XX  
Proc4 TempAlm XX  
BB Temp Alm XX  
FP Temp Alm XX  
OS shutdown Alm  
WDT timeout  
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.  
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.  
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.  
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.  
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.  
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.  
Processor #1 thermal error occurred.  
Processor #2 thermal error occurred.  
Processor #3 thermal error occurred.  
Processor #4 thermal error occurred.  
I/O board thermal error occurred.  
Front panel thermal error occurred.  
operating system shutdown alarm occurred.  
Watchdog timer timeout error occurred.  
Dump switch is pressed.  
DUMP Request !  
SMI timeout  
SMI timeout occurred.  
AC lost Alm 1  
AC lost Alm 2  
AC lost Alm 3  
AC lost Alm 4  
Power Unit 1 Alm  
Power Unit 2 Alm  
Power Unit 3 Alm  
Power Unit 4 Alm  
Predictive Alm 1  
Predictive Alm 2  
Predictive Alm 3  
Predictive Alm 4  
CPU Fan Alarm  
PWR Fan Alarm  
Sys Fan 1 Alarm  
Sys Fan 2 Alarm  
Sys Fan 3 Alarm  
Sys Fan 4 Alarm  
Sys Fan 5 Alarm  
Sys Fan 6 Alarm  
AC lost occurred on power unit #1.  
AC lost occurred on power unit #2.  
AC lost occurred on power unit #3.  
AC lost occurred on power unit #4.  
Power unit #1 Failure occurred.  
Power unit #2 Failure occurred.  
Power unit #3 Failure occurred.  
Power unit #4 Failure occurred.  
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #1.  
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #2.  
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #3.  
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #4.  
CPU FAN alarm occurred.  
Power unit FAN alarm occurred.  
FAN#1 alarm occurred.  
FAN#2 alarm occurred.  
FAN#3 alarm occurred.  
FAN#4 alarm occurred.  
FAN#5 alarm occurred.  
FAN#6 alarm occurred.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-29  
SOLVING PROBLEMS  
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given  
before asking for repair.  
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the on-screen message and  
contact your service representative.  
Problems with Server  
No screen display appears with beep:  
•
Are DIMMs installed securely?  
→ Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly.  
→ Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific group. See Chapter 9 for  
the DIMMs specifications.  
Fail to power on the server:  
•
Is the server is properly supplied with power?  
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the power specifications  
for the server.  
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord for broken shield or  
bent plugs.  
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.  
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power. See the  
manual that comes with the UPS for details.  
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the  
server.  
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>  
Did you press the POWER switch?  
•
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (the POWER/SLEEP lamp  
lights).  
Fail to power off the server / SLEEP switch is disabled:  
•
Is the POWER switch or SLEEP switch enabled?  
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>  
Is the server running in the Secure Mode?  
•
→ The POWER switch and the SLEEP switch are disabled in the Secure Mode. (Forced shutdown is also  
not available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-30  
POST fails to complete:  
•
•
•
Is the DIMM board installed?  
→ At least four DIMM boards are required for operation.  
Is the memory size large?  
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for a while.  
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server?  
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST may accidentally  
detect a keyboard controller error and stop proceeding. In such a case, restart the server once again.  
Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you  
restart the server.  
•
Does the server contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?  
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):  
•
•
•
•
Are cables properly connected?  
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also make sure that the  
cables are connected in the correct order.  
Is the power-on order correct?  
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external devices first, then the  
server.  
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?  
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that comes with the device  
to install its driver.  
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI device interrupt and others with  
the BIOS setup utility of the server. (Most PCI devices generally do not require any change to the  
configuration, but some boards do require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the  
board for details to make correct settings.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [PCI Device]>  
→ Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port address or operation mode  
settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings.  
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration]>  
USB device fail to operate:  
•
Did you connect the USB2.0 device to the USB connector on the front panel?  
→ The USB connector on the front panel is dedicated to USB1.1. Use the USB connector on the rear  
panel to connect the USB2.0 device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-31  
Management PC cannot detect the server:  
•
Is Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later used for management PC?  
→ Download Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later from  
http://java.sun.com/j2se/.  
•
Are LAN or ICMB cable properly connected?  
→ Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the management LAN port or ICMB port. If the  
cables are incorrectly connected, the sensor of the server will not be monitored. Also check if the  
cables are connected to LAN connector or serial port connector by mistake.  
•
•
Is the IP address unique in the network?  
→ The IP address for management LAN port is factory-set to 192.168.1.1. If the same address exists in  
the same network, the server will not be detected correctly. Change the IP address appropriately.  
Is the server specified to be monitored by ESMPRO Agent?  
→ Change setting of ESMPRO Agent.  
Start ESMPRO Agent from Windows control panel, select [System] → [Express5800 Server] →  
[Monitor]. (The default is [Does not monitor].) Monitoring starts automatically. You do not need to  
restart the system, however, reconfiguring the tree may be needed if the server is not detected.  
•
Is any error message displayed?  
→ See page 4-94 for details.  
The server console is not displayed on remote KVM console:  
•
Is the resolution correctly set?  
→ To display the server console on the remote KVM console, the resolution must be within 1024x768,  
and the refresh rate 75Hz. or less.  
•
Do you use the remote KVM console in text mode?  
→Under Linux, monitor, driver, and video memory settings may fail in graphical display such as  
X-Windows. We recommend using Linux in text mode.  
Forgotten the login name/password to use the remote management feature through Web browser:  
→ If you have forgotten the login name or password, restore the factory default including password by  
changing the BMC configuration jumper switch.  
IMPORTANT: Restoring the factory default clears BMC configuration that is used for  
DianaScope to connect with the server.  
If you are using DianaScope, you need to save the configuration data into a floppy disk  
before clearing password.  
BMC can be configured and saved with DianaScope Agent and the system management  
feature of EXPRESSBUILDER.  
1. Power off the server and unplug the power cord.  
2. Change the BMC configuration jumper switch setting as shown below. (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
Factory-set jumper switch location  
Jumper switch location for clearing password  
3. Connect the power cord.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-32  
4. Wait at least 30 seconds with the power being off, then unplug the power cord.  
5. Restore the BMC configuration jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration.  
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:  
•
•
•
Is the cable properly connected?  
→ Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server.  
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is powered (not applicable  
to USB devices). Power off the server first and connect it properly.  
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the settings  
with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [PS/2 Mouse], [Advanced] - [Numlock]>  
Are the server drivers installed?  
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse  
drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the operating system.) Some operating  
systems allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that comes with your  
operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.  
•
Is the server in the Secure Mode?  
→ In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the Secure Mode, enter the  
password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:  
•
•
•
Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?  
→ Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.  
Is the floppy disk write-protected?  
→ Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.  
Is the floppy disk formatted?  
→ Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Refer to the manual  
that comes with the operating system for formatting a floppy disk.  
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the setting with  
the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check:  
[Main] - [Legacy Floppy A]  
[Security] - [Floppy Write Protect]>  
Is the server in the Secure Mode?  
•
→ In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy disk may be disabled. To release the Secure Mode,  
enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-33  
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:  
•
Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?  
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the CD-ROM is placed  
properly in the holder.  
•
Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?  
→ A CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.  
Fail to access to the CD-R disk:  
•
•
Is the mounting surface correct?  
→ Take out the CD-R disk from the tray, and then set it again with its labelled surface upward.  
Is there any soil or crack on CD-R disk?  
→ Make sure there is no soil due to fingerprint or others on the disk surface. Also make sure that there is  
no crack on the disk surface. Clean the disk surface if it is soiled.  
If read-out still fails, set another disk of which data has been successfully read out to check if the drive  
can read the disk.  
•
•
Is the CD-R disk closed?  
→ Close the session or set the disk in closed status, and try to read again.  
Are the CD-R disk and writing software appropriate to the disk drive?  
→ The CD-ROM drive of the server may fail if the combination of disk drive, writing software, and  
CD-R is not correct.  
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:  
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.  
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.  
OK  
•
Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or scratched?  
→ Take the CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty or injured, reset and click  
[OK].  
Fail to access the hard disk:  
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)  
•
•
Is the hard disk applicable to the server?  
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.  
Is the hard disk properly installed?  
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not connected to the  
internal connector when it is not completely installed (see Chapter 9).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-34  
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:  
•
•
Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?  
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.  
Is the cable connection changed?  
→ The SCSI connector (B) on the I/O board in the machine can be used for either built-in file devices or  
external SCSI devices. The connection to external devices must be switched by modifying cable  
connection properly.  
•
•
Are SCSI devices properly configured?  
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, device settings, including SCSI ID and  
terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details.  
Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?  
→ Use the BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector  
on the I/O board. When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices  
connected to it, use the BIOS setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper  
configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-35  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64  
Editions.  
Source:  
DCOM  
Error  
Category  
Event ID  
10016  
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation permission for the  
COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E-4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the  
user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.  
This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative tool.  
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-36  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000  
Cannot install the operating system correctly.  
•
Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?  
→ See Chapter 6.  
During Windows 2000 installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer:  
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0 during the paging  
operation.  
→ There is no problem on this issue.  
Fail to start the operating system:  
•
•
•
Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?  
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.  
Is the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?  
→ Take out the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.  
Is the operating system broken?  
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.  
(See "Recovery for Windows 2000" in this Chapter.)  
The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log:  
Description (D)  
The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level.  
To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of  
the least capable processor in the system. Should problems occur with  
this system, contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors  
is supported.  
•
Has the processor been expanded?  
→ If different revisions (steppings) of the processors are installed in a multiprocessor system, Windows  
2000 logs the above information every startup. If this message is logged, it is no problem for  
operation.  
The operating system presents unstable operation:  
•
Did you update the system?  
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the operating system may cause unstable operation. Use  
the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system. (See Chapter 6.)  
When any trouble occurred, the system does not run according to the specification of "Restart automatically":  
→ When any trouble occurred on Windows 2000, the system may not restart automatically even if  
"Restart automatically" is specified. In such case, restart the system manually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-37  
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:  
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced power off (forced shut down:  
continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds). The power will not be turned off if you press the  
switch just one time.  
The server is not found on the network:  
•
Is the LAN cable connected?  
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server. Also make sure that  
the LAN cable to use conforms to the network interface standard.  
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the  
setting with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check:  
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Embedded NIC 1], [Embedded NIC 2]>  
Have the protocol and service already be configured?  
•
•
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol, such as TCP/IP, and  
services are properly specified.  
Is the transfer speed correct?  
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value  
the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
The processor name displayed in [General] tab of [System Property] is not in correct position.  
→ There is no problem for operation.  
The system displays the message below and fails to log in.  
→ In Windows Server 2003, the following message will be displayed if you use the operating system  
without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and execute the procedure for license  
authentication.  
Windows Product Activation  
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can  
continue, You cannot log on until you activate Windows.  
Do you want to activate Windows now?  
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.  
YES  
NO  
Cancel  
Unable to update the system:  
•
Are you trying to update the system without applying Service Pack or with Service Pack 1, 2, or 3?  
→ Without applying Service Pack and applying Service Pack 1, 2, or 3 to this system are not supported.  
You have to apply Service Pack 4 to update the system.  
If you use Windows 2000 CD-ROM which includes Service Pack 4 to install Windows 2000 on your  
system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again when you update the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-38  
About System Log when re-starting the system on Windows Server 2003  
Type:  
Source:  
Event ID:  
Warning  
E100B  
4
Description: Adapter Intel(R) PRO/100 Network Connection: Adapter Link Down  
→ When re-starting the system without connecting the network cable, this log may be found in system  
event log.  
But this has no effect on the behaviour of LAN driver.  
Confirm that the system is connected with the LAN cable properly.  
If 100Base LAN port is not used, disable 100Base LAN on device manager or disable it on BIOS  
configuration. Then, the log will not be registered.  
Event logs in using SNMP Service in Windows Server 2003  
Event Type:  
Warning  
Event Source: EvntAgnt  
Event Category: None  
Event ID:  
1015  
Description:  
TraceLevel parameter not located in registry;  
Default trace level used is 32.  
Event Type:  
Warning  
Event Source: EvntAgnt  
Event Category: None  
Event ID:  
1003  
Description:  
TraceFileName parameter not located in registry;  
Default trace file used is .  
→ The system will not be affected by these event logs. SNMP will not be affected either, so that you can  
ignore these logs.  
A PCI board is not recognized.  
•
•
•
Is the PCI board installed correctly?  
→ Confirm that the PCI board is installed in the slot correctly.  
Is the proper IRQ assigned for the board?  
→ Assign the proper IRQ by referring to Chapter 4.  
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot to install SCSI card (excluding the array board used  
for operating system boot)?  
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed  
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>  
•
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot for added network board which is not used for  
network boot?  
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed  
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-39  
PCI hot-plug fails:  
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ You must change the BIOS configuration to use the PCI hot-plug feature.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] -  
[Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]>  
*
Setting value depends on the board to be installed. See Chapter 4 for details.  
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Empty Bus Default  
Speed] - [PCI Slots 5-6] or [PCI Slots 7-8] - Transfer speed of the board to be installed>  
The driver of a PCI board cannot be stopped from the operating system when Hot Remove or Hot Replace is  
executed for the PCI board:  
•
Is another software application using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be  
executed?  
→ If another software application is using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be  
executed, the driver of the PCI board cannot be stopped.  
Terminate the software, then stop the driver of the PCI board. If executing Hot Replace, restart the  
software after having mounted a new PCI board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-40  
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER  
When the server is not booted from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:  
•
Did you insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server?  
→ If you do not insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server, an error  
message will appear or the operating system will boot.  
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Use the BIOS setup  
utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD-ROM drive first.  
<Menu to check: [Boot]>  
•
Is an error message appeared?  
→ When an error occurs while EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, one of the following messages  
appears.  
After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the  
message listed in the table below.  
Message  
Cause and Remedy  
This machine is not supported.  
This EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this  
server. Execute EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.  
NVRAM access error.  
An access to the non-volatile memory (NVRAM) is not  
acceptable.  
Hard disk access error.  
The hard disk is not connected or it is failed.  
Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected.  
The system-specific information does not exist on  
the I/O board.  
The system-specific information cannot be acquired in the I/O  
board exchange and so on.  
Please restore the backup data or write the data by  
using [System Information Management] of the  
Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-41  
Problems with Express Setup  
Express Setup can not be used  
→ Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
If you want to perform re-setup, see Appendix D and perform "Manual Setup".  
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has smaller capacity  
than the specified partition size:  
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.  
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.  
Setup will continue the process.  
OK  
→ It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.  
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking CD-ROM:  
→ Press R. When any messages appear again even if you press R, restart the Express Setup from the  
beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of installation, contact your service  
representative and ask them to check the CD-ROM drive.  
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.  
→ There are some errors on the specified setup information.  
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the installation. On  
Windows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the setup.  
[Complete] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.  
→ If you click [Complete] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the later  
specification to continue the process.  
<The Default Value for Windows 2000>  
The specification of network protocol  
Protocol :  
Service :  
Client :  
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]  
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.  
Microsoft network client.  
Component :  
Application :  
SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional/Windows Server 2003)  
ESMPRO Agent  
Power Console Plus (When disk array system)  
[Complete] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.  
→ [Complete] does not appear if the setup information file that has already been created is loaded.  
→ [Complete] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.  
Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [Complete] will not appear even if you enter  
[Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.  
Select [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the operating system is installed in the  
whole area of the disk.  
→ Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)? If no other partition  
than the one to re-use exist, the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-42  
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.  
→ When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the system as Workgroup.  
Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain.  
Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows 2000 is actually started, the system partition is created  
by 4095 MB.  
→ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area? If you want to create one partition  
in all area of the hard disk (excluding the maintenance area) to install the operating system, specify [All  
Area].  
Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value.  
→ If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the nearest value or the default  
value of the driver.  
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.  
→ Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start. However, the setup will  
stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this case, input request will occur when rebooting  
after GUI setup completed during Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem  
on Windows 2000 setup.  
Unable to specify the details of network adapter.  
→ In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify them from Control Panel  
after starting Windows 2000.  
Windows 2000 is started with network adapter that has not been specified during Express Setup  
→ Windows 2000 will install the recognized network adapter specified as default value. If you want to  
modify the specification, it can be done from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000. Also, a network  
adapter that has been specified during Express Setup but is not connected will not be setup, though the  
protocol will only be installed.  
Connected more than two network adapters and specified a different protocol for each adapter, but all the  
protocols are specified on either adapter.  
→ It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.  
The values that cannot be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value.  
When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP protocol are all set to  
use DHCP.  
→ When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of the protocol may all be  
set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.  
Not more than two network adapters are connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by  
default. (e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)  
→ Are you specifying more than two protocols?  
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network adapter, so the detailed  
specification of the protocol are all set by default.  
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the operating system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-43  
Changed the giga driver speed from 1000M bps to 100M bps. But the changed speed is not properly displayed in  
Network Details of ESMPRO data viewer (still 1000M bps is indicated):  
→ It does not affect the operation of LAN driver.  
Setup is interrupted at "Creating a working partition" process during the Express Setup.  
•
Did you connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on?  
→ Disconnect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on, and perform the  
Express Setup.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-44  
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration  
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurred on disk array in this system.  
The operating system cannot be installed:  
•
Is configuration of the disk array controller performed?  
→ Perform configuration properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
The operating system cannot be started:  
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller changed?  
→ Set it properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility.  
Does POST recognize the disk array controller?  
•
→ Check that the disk array controller is connected correctly and then turn the power ON.  
→ When the disk array is connected correctly but is not recognized, it may be faulty. Contact the  
maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased this controller  
from.  
Rebuilding cannot be performed:  
•
Is the capacity of the hard disk to be rebuilt insufficient?  
→ Use a hard disk of the same capacity as the faulty one.  
•
Is the RAID configuration RAID0?  
→ RAID0 does not have redundancy thus rebuilding cannot be performed. Replace the "DEAD" hard  
disk, create configuration information again, perform initialization and then restore using the backup  
data.  
Auto-rebuild cannot be performed:  
•
Is the interval enough when hot swap are executed?  
→ Take interval more than 90 seconds when hot swap are executed.  
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller correct?  
→ Check the BIOS setting for disk array controller by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility. Select  
"Objects" → "Adapter" → "Auto Rebuild" from the TOP menu.  
A hard disk goes into "FAIL" status:  
→ Contact the maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased it  
from.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-45  
Problems with Master Control Menu  
The master control menu fails to appear:  
•
•
•
Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?  
→ The Master Control menu is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.  
Is Shift pressed?  
→ Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.  
Is the system in the proper state?  
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD-ROM.  
In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.  
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator  
<Common to Windows 2000>  
The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly during setting of  
setup information. (When the Trekking command is used)  
→ If the specified number of colours is fewer than 256 in the display setting, the bit map is not displayed  
correctly, but the setup information can be displayed correctly.  
The Point to Point tunnelling protocol cannot be set.  
→ The protocol is not supported at present. After installation, set the protocol through Control Panel. In this  
case, rebooting is not necessary.  
The details of a network adapter cannot be set.  
→ Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters. Start Windows 2000, and  
set the details through Control Panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-46  
COLLECTING EVENT LOG  
This section describes how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below  
after restarting the system.  
NOTE: Different revisions of processors may be mixed in the additional processor kit.  
When Windows 2000 is used, following message may be appeared in the System Log of the  
Event Viewer after extension of different revisions of two or more processors in the Express  
server. If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.  
1. Click [Management Tool] → [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.  
2. Select the type of the log to collect.  
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application are archived. On [Security Log], the  
events related to the security are archived. On [System Log], the events occurred at the item which configures  
Windows 2000 system are archived.  
3. Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.  
4. Type the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.  
5. Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].  
For more information, refer to Windows 2000 Online Help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-47  
COLLECT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION  
This section describes how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification.  
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below  
after restarting the system.  
1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].  
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [System Tool] → [System Information].  
4. Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.  
5. Type the file name to save in the [File Name] box.  
6. Click [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-48  
COLLECTING DR. WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION  
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the information can be  
specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.  
MEMORY DUMP  
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.  
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the label. You can specify  
the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump  
(Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for detail)".  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Contact your service representative before dumping the memory. Dumping the memory  
while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation.  
„
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient  
virtual memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system may result in  
dumping improper data.  
Preparing for Memory Dumping  
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is required to force the  
server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if "Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit"  
on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.  
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server.  
1. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility.  
2. Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.  
3. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-49  
Saving the Dump File  
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a straightened large paper clip  
will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.  
DUMP switch  
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may not be available when  
the processor stalls.)  
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break. Use a pin  
having the length of 1 inch (25 mm) or longer.  
25 mm or longer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-50  
RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000 SYSTEM  
If any file necessary for running the operating system is damaged, use the following procedures to recover the system.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
After recovering the system, see "Updating the System" in Chapter 5 and be sure to  
update the system.  
Also on Windows 2000, you need to update all the drivers after the system update. For  
more information, see "Installing and Setting Device Drivers" in Chapter 5.  
„
If the hard disk can not be recognised, you can not recover the system.  
Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk, not system recovery disk, to recover the system.  
1. Turn on the power of the system.  
2. Insert Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your server.  
3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then  
on again to reboot the server.)  
4. Press F6 while the message "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..." is displayed at the  
upper part of the screen.  
NOTE: Nothing is changed on the screen when F6 is pressed.  
5. Press S when the following message appears:  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your  
system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).  
Select [Other] and press Enter.  
6. Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
* Press ENTER when ready.  
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2000] and press Enter.  
7. Press R to select the recovery option.  
8. If you are requested, press R to select system recovery procedure.  
9. If you are requested, select either of the procedure below:  
[Manual Recovery] (Press M)  
Do not select this option unless you are a high-level user or a system administrator. If you use this option,  
you can recover the problems of system files, partition boot sector, and start-up environment.  
[Quick Recovery] (Press F)  
This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the procedure. If you  
select this option, the system recovery disk program starts to recover the problems concerning system  
files, partition boot sector of system disk, and start-up environment (if multiple operating systems are  
installed on the system).  
10. Follow the on-screen instructions, and then press L at the screen which request you to insert system recovery  
disk. The system will be restarted once.  
NOTE: Start the procedure without system recovery disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-51  
11. Repeat steps 4 to 9.  
The recovery procedure will be started.  
During the recovery, the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files in C:\ I386 folder  
of hard disk or the files in systemroot\ Repair of the system partition. These replaced files do not reflect the  
changes of the configuration after the setup at all.  
12. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.  
If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure, it is useful to diagnose  
how the system has been damaged.  
13. Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful.  
You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if the computer is restarted  
normally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-52  
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program. When you are unable to  
start the operating system dependent ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance Utility can be used.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use by your service representative. The  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy  
disk you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not  
attempt to use the utility by yourself. Contact your service representative and follow  
instructions.  
„
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server.  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.  
„ From the CD-ROM  
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.  
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.  
„ From the floppy disk  
Insert the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create Support FD"  
on the EXPRESSBUILDER.  
„ Manual start (by pressing F4)  
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of the server is on  
screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-53  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary depending on the way you  
started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)  
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line Maintenance Utility. For  
further information, ask your service representative.  
„ IPMI Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and field replaceable  
unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.  
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.  
„ BIOS Setup Viewer  
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the Setup utility to a text file.  
„ System Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file.  
„ System Information Management  
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.  
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be restored.  
Only an authorised person is allowed to restore the backup data.  
„ Start of Utilities  
With EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the maintenance partition.  
–
–
–
System Management  
System Diagnostics  
Maintenance Partition Update  
„ Chassis Identify  
This function can distinguish the machine with the lamp or buzzer of the machine.  
This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-54  
RESETTING THE SERVER  
„ If the server halts before starting the operating system, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.  
This restarts the server.  
„ Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server.  
RESET switch  
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process. To  
reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that no processing is in progress.  
FORCED SHUTDOWN  
Use this function when an operating system command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not turn  
off the server, or resetting does not work.  
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly turned off. To turn on  
the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power (forced shutdown).  
Press and hold the  
POWER switch at least 4  
seconds.  
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once to load the  
operating system, and turn off the power again in the normal way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Upgrading Your Server  
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or removing such  
optional devices, and notes on using them.  
„ IMPORTANT:  
„
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user.  
However, we do not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or  
malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user. We recommend you  
ask your service representative for installing or removing any optional devices.  
„
„
Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorised by us. Repair of the server  
due to malfunctions, failures, or damage resulting from installing inappropriate devices  
or cables will be charged.  
When you made any change to the hardware configuration, make sure to update the  
system (see Chapter 5 for details.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9-2  
SAFETY NOTES  
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
Do not remove the lithium, Ni-CD, and/or NiMH battery.  
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not lift the server only by a single person.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.  
High temperature  
Put a connector cover on an unused connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3  
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES  
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by static electricity when  
installing or removing any optional devices.  
„ Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).  
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet  
before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body.  
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity.  
„ Select a suitable work space.  
– Work with the server on an anti-static or concrete floor.  
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated, make sure take  
anti-static measures beforehand.  
„ Use a work table.  
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.  
„ Cloth  
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.  
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.  
– Take off any jewels (ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.  
„ Handling of components  
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it into the server.  
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.  
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4  
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL  
Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components.  
1. Shut down the operating system.  
2. Press the POWER switch to power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
3. Unplug the power cord from the AC inlet on the server  
The AC Standby lamp on the front of the server goes off.  
4. Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel.  
5. Make a clearance of 1m to 2m in the front and rear sides and left and right sides of the server.  
NOTE: Make sure to disconnect the power cord from the outlet before installing or  
removing the option devices. If you remove the internal cable with the power cord being  
connected, the STATUS lamp will light in amber when the server is powered. Disconnect  
the power cord, connect it again, and then restart the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-5  
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE  
Install or remove a component from the server as follows.  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
The 3.5-inch device bay on the front of the server contains five slots in which hard disk drives can be installed. The  
device bay is not equipped with any hard disk drives (excluding when one or more built-in hard disk drives are ordered).  
Purchase additional hard disk drives if required.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not use any hard disk drives that are not authorised by us. Installing a third-party's  
hard disk drive may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk drive.  
„
The supported RAID level depends on the disk array controller to be used.  
–
Onboard RAID:  
RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 (See "Disk Array Configuration" in this chapter.)  
–
Optional disk array controller:  
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller. (If you purchased the  
board by BTO (built-to-order), the manual is provided with the server.)  
All five slots may contain a hard disk drive approximately 25.4 mm (1 inch) high. The SCSI IDs ID0 through ID4 are  
always assigned to hard disk drives as shown below.  
ID0  
ID1  
ID0  
ID2  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID3  
ID4  
ID8  
ID9  
ID10  
ID11  
HDD cage (option)  
The 3.5-inch disk bay cable is connected between the SCSI (Ch-A) connector and the hard disk drives cage on the I/O  
board when the server is shipped.  
To use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration by using the on-board RAID controller, you do not need to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6  
change cable connection. However, to use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration using the optional RAID  
controller, you need to use a separately priced SCSI cable. Remove the cable that is connected between the SCSI Ch-A  
connector and the hard disk drives cage, and connect the separately priced SCSI cable to the connector between the hard  
disk drives cage and the disk array controller.  
In the disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.  
Installation  
Install a hard disk drive as follows. This procedure applies to all the slots.  
NOTE: In RAID1 or RAID5 configuration, the hard disk drive can be installed or removed  
while the server is being powered.  
IMPORTANT: In a disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare (except for disk array  
configuration).  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.  
The server has five slots. The SCSI IDs assigned to the slots are all determined (SCSI ID 0 to ID 4 from right  
to left).  
4. Remove the empty drive carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-7  
5. Using the provided screws, secure the hard disk drive into the empty drive carrier.  
6. Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive and handle, and insert it into the slot.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Push the hard disk drive until the handle hook hits the frame.  
Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands.  
7. Slowly close the handle.  
The handle is locked when a "click" is heard.  
NOTE: Make sure that the handle is hooked to the frame when having inserted the hard  
disk drive.  
8. Close the front door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8  
Removal  
Remove a hard disk drive as follows. To use the server with the hard disk drive removed, insert an empty drive carrier  
into the empty slot.  
1. Shutdown the system and press the POWER switch to turn off the power.  
2. Unlock the hard disk drive.  
1
2
3. Firmly hold the hard disk drive and handle, then take them out.  
NOTE: If removing a failing hard disk drive, confirm the slot in which the DISK lamp of  
the hard disk drive is amber before starting the removal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-9  
DISK lamps  
When the hard disk drives are in the disk array configuration, you can restore the state before an error using the  
auto-rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk drive into a new one.  
The auto-rebuild feature may be enabled or disabled depending on the RAID level.  
Auto-rebuild is automatically carried out when you hot-swap a failed hard disk drive with a new one (replace the disk  
while the server is powered). While auto-rebuild is in progress, the DISK lamp flashes green and amber alternatively to  
indicate it.  
IMPORTANT: When auto-rebuild fails, the DISK lamp lights in amber. Remove and  
install the hard disk drive again to restart auto-rebuild. (If the disk array monitoring utility  
is installed, check the indication of the utility.)  
Observe the following notes for auto-rebuild.  
„ Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk drive error and completion of auto-rebuild.  
„ When you removed a hard disk drive, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk drive back again.  
„ Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in progress. (The DISK lamp flashes green and  
amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk drive.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10  
Power Supply Unit  
Even if one of three power supply units fails, the server can continue its operation without interruption when an  
additional power supply unit is installed (in the redundant configuration).  
If the four power supply units are used, AC power can be divided into two lines with a pair of power supply units. With  
the AC power redundant configuration, the server can continue its operation without power interruption even if either of  
AC power line fails.  
Installation  
Install a power supply unit as follows:  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the screw securing the blank cover.  
3. Remove the blank cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-11  
4. Insert the power supply unit into the slot.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to push straight the power supply unit. To avoid damaging the  
power supply unit, do not tilt or twist the unit as you push it into the connector.  
NOTE: Make sure that the power supply unit is pushed in to an end securely.  
5. Connect two power cords to AC inlet.  
Use the power cord provided with the power supply unit and the one provided with the optional unit.  
IMPORTANT: A blank cover is attached to the slot for additional power supply unit.  
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.  
AC inlet  
AC inlet for additional  
power supply unit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12  
6. Power on the server.  
The POWER lamp on the power supply units goes on.  
7. Confirm, by the STATUS lamp or on the POST diagnostic screen, that there are no errors related to the power  
supply units.  
See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages.  
If the POWER lamps are off, reinstall the power supply units. If the POWER lamps are still off, contact your  
service representative.  
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit  
Replace only a failing power supply unit.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally.  
NOTE: If two power supply units work normally while the server contains three or four  
power supply units in a redundant configuration, the failing power supply unit can be  
replaced with the system operating (power-on state). (Skip step 2.)  
1. Check the POWER lamp on the power supply unit and determine which unit needs to be replaced.  
The lamp of the failing power supply unit is off.  
2. Shutdown the system, and turn off the server.  
3. While pressing down on the locking tab, grasp the handle and carefully pull the power supply unit out of the  
power supply bay.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the power supply unit and/or connector, do not tilt or  
twist the unit as you pull it from the power supply bay. Use even, steady force to remove  
the unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-13  
4. If you are not going to install a replacement power supply unit, you must install a blank cover you removed in  
step 2 of installation procedure to vacant slot.  
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the blank cover in the  
vacant slot of the power supply bay.  
5. Install the new power supply unit taking steps 3 to 6 of "Installation", and confirm that the power supply unit  
is installed normally.  
NOTE: If one of the three or four power supply units of the server is replaced while the  
power is on, the POWER lamp of the new power supply unit goes on. (If it is replaced  
while the power is off, the lamp goes on after the power is turned on.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14  
5.25-inch Device  
The server contains two slots in which SCSI backup devices such as magnetic tape drive can be installed.  
Slot #2  
Slot #1  
Available Devices  
The 5.25-inch device slot can contain two single-height SCSI devices, or one full-height device.  
„ To connect the 5.25-inch device with the on-board SCSI controller, connect the SCSI cable mounted on the  
5.25-inch device bay to "Ch-B" of SCSI connector on I/O board. In this case, assign the SCSI ID between 0  
and 6 for the device to be installed. Set the terminator to "Disabled".  
„ If the "Ch-B" of SCSI connector on I/O board is connected to the additional HDD cage, connect the 5.25-inch  
device to the optional SCSI controller board.  
Setting of SCSI ID  
When connecting the 5.25-inch device with the SCSI connector (Ch-B) on I/O board, set the SCSI ID 0 through 6.  
When connecting the 5.25-inch device with the optional SCSI controller, refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI  
controller.  
„ Setting of terminator  
Set the terminator to "OFF".  
Installation  
Described below are installation procedures for both IDE device and SCSI device.  
For SCSI device, procedures for connecting the device to SCSI connector "Ch-B" on I/O board are explained here. To  
connect it to the optional SCSI controller board, see "Cable Connection" described later.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Open the front door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-15  
3. Pull the dummy cover toward you gently and carefully.  
4. Pull the SCSI cable and power cable out of the 5.25-inch device bay.  
5. Install the two latching rails coming with the server to the device with the screw (PL-CPIMSx3x6x15BF)  
provided with the server.  
IMPORTANT: Always use the screws coming with the server. Do not use the screws  
coming with the 5.25-inch device. Using longer screws or those of different diameter may  
cause the device to be broken.  
NOTE: Use the lower screw holes to secure the rail to the device.  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-16  
6. Connect the interface cable.  
Connect the SCSI and power cables secured in the 5.25-inch device bay to the 5.25-inch device.  
IMPORTANT: A connector cap is attached to the power cable. Keep the removed cap for  
future use.  
7. Push the 5.25-inch device to the device bay carefully until a click occurs to lock it.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
If the SCSI connector "Ch-B" is connected to the additional HDD cage, install the  
optional SCSI controller board to connect with the 5.25-inch device.  
„
Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause a malfunction to occur.  
Provide the connection securely watching the 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.  
NOTE: Make sure that the cable is not caught.  
8. Close the front door.  
9. Provide the setup for the SCSI controller.  
If the 5.25-inch device is connected to optional SCSI controller board, refer to the manual that comes with the  
SCSI controller board for setup.  
Removal  
Remove the 5.25-inch device in the reverse procedure of the installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-17  
Rear Access Cover  
To install or remove a PCI board, or to change cable connections of internal SCSI cable, you will need to remove the  
rear access cover.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions  
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Be sure to power off the server before removing the rear access cover.  
Removal  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Loosen the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.  
3. Slide the rear access cover toward the rear of the chassis.  
4. Lift the cover up and off of the chassis.  
Captive screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-18  
Installation  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the rear access cover, check that you have not left tools  
or loose parts inside the system.  
1. Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots.  
2. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the front of the chassis.  
3. Attach the cover to the chassis with the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.  
Captive screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-19  
PCI Access Cover  
To install or remove a non-hot-swap PCI board, remove the PCI access cover inside the server. You do not need to  
remove the PCI access cover when you work with hot-swap PCI slot.  
Removal  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the rear access cover.  
3. Loosen the screw securing the PCI access cover.  
4. Hold the end of the cover (the end where the screw is loosened), and take out the cover slowly and gently.  
Installation  
Take the following steps to install the PCI access cover.  
1. Orient the PCI access cover with the screw toward the front of the server.  
2. Insert the tab on the rear side of the PCI access cover into the chassis slot.  
3. Slowly and gently put the cover on the chassis, and secure it with a screw.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-20  
PCI Board  
The server contains six slots for PCI board, and three slots for PCI-Express board.  
Some PCI boards support the hot-plug function by which they may be installed or removed with the power of the server  
being on. Your server supports the hot-plug function if the Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is used as operating  
system. The PCI boards supporting the hot-plug function only include the N8104-86 100BASE-TX Adapter, N8104-111  
100BASE-TX Adapter and the N8103-103 1000BASE-T Adapter.  
IMPORTANT: The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to  
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before  
handling the PCI board. Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on-board parts by a bare  
hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section  
"Anti-static Measures".  
NOTES:  
„
The tab on the PCI board slot indicates hot-plug or non-hot-plug by its colour. Hot-plug  
slots have a green tab (PCI slot #5 through #8), and non-hot-plug slots have a blue tab  
(PCI slot #1 through #4).  
„
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8  
PCI-Express board.  
Non-hot-plug PCI board slots  
(colour: blue)  
Hot-plug PCI board slots  
(colour: green)  
PCI #1, #2 (32-bit/33MHz, 5V PCI)  
PCI #3 (PCI-Express (x4))  
PCI #4, #5 (PCI-Express(x8))  
PCI #6, #7, #8, #9  
(64-bit/100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-21  
There are three types of PCI boards: 5V PCI boards, 3.3V PCI boards, and universal PCI boards.  
A 5V PCI board must be installed in the 5V PCI slot, and a 3.3V PCI board must be installed in the 3.3V PCI slot. A  
universal PCI board can be installed in any PCI slot.  
5V PCI board  
3.3V PCI board  
Universal PCI board  
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8 PCI-Express boards.  
PCI-Express board (x4)  
PCI-Express board (x8)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22  
RAID Controller Considerations  
Note the following on the configuration of a disk array by using the on-board or optional disk array controller.  
„ To change the disk array configuration or the RAID, the hard disk drives must be initialised. If important data  
is saved in the hard disk drives used to constitute a disk array, first back up the data in other hard disk drives  
before installing boards and configuring the disk array.  
„ At least two hard disk drives are required to configure a disk array.  
„ Hard disk drives used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate and capacity in  
packs.  
„ See the table on next page for the slot in which an optional board can be installed.  
„ Up to four disk array controller boards can be installed in the server.  
„ Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) levels can be set for the disk array  
configuration in the server. See "Disk Array Configuration" described later for available RAIDs, data transfer  
rate, and array configuration.  
For an optional disk array controller, refer to the documentation coming with the disk array controller for  
details.  
„ The available capacity of the hard disk drives in the disk array configuration is lower than the total capacity of  
the hard disk drives configuring the disk array while the disk reliability is improved (for RAID 1, 5, 10, or  
50).  
„ Set "Option ROM Scan," a parameter of the slot in which a hard disk is installed, to "Enabled" in "PCI  
Configuration" in the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. For other slots, set the parameter to  
"Disabled". ("Enabled" is factory-set.) If two or more disk array controllers are installed, set only the slot  
containing the board to boot-up to "Enabled". Do not set "Option ROM Scan" for embedded SCSI to  
"Disabled".  
„ Replacement of I/O board or optional disk array controller board  
Back up the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller board to a floppy disk and restore  
it to the replaced disk array controller board. Use the configuration utility for backup and restoration. See  
"Disk Array Configuration" described later or refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for  
details. If a disk array controller is replaced, create the configuration information newly by using the proper  
utility.  
When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server, install the disk array controller  
board to which the system disk is connected in the PCI slot having the highest boot priority.  
Boot priority: PCI#3 → PCI#4 → PCI#5 → PCI#8 → PCI#9 → PCI#6 → PCI#7 → PCI#1 → PCI#2  
For example, if four disk array controller boards are installed in PCI slots #6 to #9, the system disk should be  
connected to the board installed in PCI slot #8.  
„ The maximum total capacity of the hard disk drives that are configured as a logical drive or a pack is 2 TB  
(terabyte).  
„ The maximum logical disk capacity for installing Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system or Linux  
operating system is 1 TB.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-23  
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots  
PCI  
PCI Express  
#4  
PCI-X  
#7  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#5  
#6  
Bus E  
#8  
#9  
Description  
Bus A  
Bus B Bus C Bus D  
Bus F  
32-bit/33MHz  
x4  
x8  
64-bit/100MHz  
Product Name  
Slot size  
Full-height  
PCI board type  
Available board size  
Hot-plug  
5V  
x8 socket  
3.3V  
Long/short  
Non-hot-plug  
Hot-plug  
Initio 101  
Adaptec 29320  
SCSI controller  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(32bit/33MHz PCI) *5  
SCSI controller  
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *5  
SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b SCSI controller  
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *5  
SecuRAID 321  
Emulex LP1050  
Disk array controller  
(64bit/66MHz PCI) *4  
Fibre Channel controller  
(2Gbps/Optical)  
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *4  
64B PCI-X PRO 1000MT 1000BASE-T Adapter  
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
DUAL  
(2ch)(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
*1  
INTEL PRO/1000 TX  
64-BIT PCI  
INTEL PRO/1000 F  
64-BIT PCI  
1000BASE-T Adapter  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *1  
1000BASE-SX Adapter  
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *1  
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
Only one card can be installed per a PCI-X bus.  
Up to two cards can be installed.  
Up to three cards can be installed.  
Up to four cards can be installed.  
Up to six cards can be installed.  
NOTE: The system BIOS initialises the PCI slots in the order shown below. The order  
may be changed according to the types and number of PCI cards.  
PCI#3→PCI#4→PCI#5→PCI#8→PCI#9→PCI#6→PCI#7→PCI#1→PCI#2  
Onboard LAN Controller Considerations  
It is possible to configure the Teaming function of AFT (Adapter Fault Tolerance)/ALB (Adaptive Load Balancing) in a  
standard network controller (on board LAN controller).  
But it is also impossible to configure the Teaming function of the same AFT/ALB on a standard network controller and  
an optional LAN board.  
Restriction on Teaming among Onboard LANs  
When teaming is configured among onboard LANs, the following system event log appears when Windows starts. You  
can ignore this message and continue operation.  
source: iANSMiniport  
event IDs: 11/13/16/22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-24  
Non-hot-plug PCI Boards  
This section describes the procedure for installing or removing a non-hot-plug PCI board.  
Installation  
Install a board in a PCI board slot as follows.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
PCI board slots #6 to #9 can accept 3.3V and universal PCI boards.  
PCI board slots #1 and #2 can accept 5V and universal PCI boards.  
NOTES:  
„
Before installing the PCI board, make sure that the terminal section of the board mates  
with the connector of the PCI board slot.  
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI  
board already been installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when  
installing or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in  
place.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the system and devices, always turn off the system  
before installing a non-hot swap board.  
2. Remove the rear access cover.  
3. Locate the slot to install a board.  
4. Press the retention tab at the tip of the additional slot cover to unlock and open the tab.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could  
damage the tab.  
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-25  
5. Remove the blank plate.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the blank plate being removed for future use.  
6. Align the board with the grooves of the guide rail, and insert the board slowly and gently.  
7. Carefully push the board until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector.  
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed easily, remove the board once and then  
reinstall it. Excess force added to the board may cause the board to be broken.  
NOTES:  
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.  
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI  
board already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing  
or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-26  
8. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.  
NOTE: Make sure that the tab is firmly locked. If the tab is unlocked, the PCI board  
and/or I/O board may be damaged due to unstable PCI board.  
9. Reinstall the removed components.  
10. Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear in POST.  
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in Chapter 8.  
11. Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced" menu to "Yes."  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Removal  
Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-27  
Hot-plug PCI Board  
On the PCI board slots #5 through #9, you can replace or add a hot-plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
Only N8104-86 100BASE-TX Adapter, N8104-111 100BASE-TX Adapter and N8104-103 1000BASE-T Adapter  
support the Hot-plug PCI function.  
The PCI hot-plug function includes the following functions:  
„ Hot Add  
Use Hot Add to install a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
„ Hot Remove  
Use Hot Remove to remove a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
„ Hot Replace  
Use Hot Replace to replace a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot (containing the PCI board)  
from the operating system (Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000). Failure to do so may cause  
the system to fail.  
„
For Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 server, do not use a function in inactive state after  
executing the PCI Hot-plug function. The system fails to return to the original state when a  
function in inactive state is restarted.  
Use the BIOS Setup utility to set the following before executing the PCI Hot Plug function:  
Select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] → [Reserving memory  
space for PHP] → Select memory space for installed board*1.  
*1 The memory capacity appears to be less than the actually installed memory capacity.  
„
„
To execute the PCI Hot-plug function, be sure to log in the system as Administrator.  
The board available for the hot add varies depending on the clock rate previously set by PCI  
slots #6 and #7 or #8 and #9. If a PCI board operating at a different clock rate is subject to the  
hot addition, the PCI slot fault lamp goes on and the hot plug cannot be performed correctly.  
However, restarting the system allows BIOS to ignore the setting value and automatically  
operate the system with the optimum setting.  
Requirements for Hot Add  
„ No boards installed in the same bus  
Verify the available slot according to "List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots", and then hot-add  
the PCI card.  
„ PCI boards installed on the same bus  
Provide Hot Add for PCI boards operating at the same clock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-28  
Status Lamps  
Two LEDs on the back panel indicate the status of the hot-plug PCI add-in boards. You can check the indication by  
lamps on the I/O board.  
„ PCI slot Power lamp (green)  
Lights when power is supplied normally to the PCI board installed.  
„ PCI slot Fault lamp (amber)  
Lights when an error occurs on PCI board or the slot containing the PCI board.  
Flashes when the driver is stopped from Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 for Hot Remove or Hot  
Replace.  
PCI slot Fault lamp  
PCI slot Power lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-29  
Hot Add  
Take the following procedure to execute Hot Add:  
1. Remove the rear access cover from the server with the power being on.  
2. Locate the slot in which you are going to install an additional board.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the slot in which you are going to install  
the PCI board is off.  
3. Push the tab at the tip of the additional slot cover of the slot in which you are going to install the PCI board to  
unlock the tab. Open the tab.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could  
damage the tab.  
1
2
4. Remove the slot cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed slot cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-30  
5. Push the PCI board slowly and carefully into the slot.  
6. Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.  
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to  
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause  
damage to the PCI board.  
NOTES:  
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.  
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI  
boards already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when  
installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator  
in place.  
7. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.  
8. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.  
9. Press the PCI Hot Plug switch. The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and then, goes on.  
NOTES:  
„
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the operating system  
automatically recognises the additionally installed PCI board and installs the driver.  
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on  
(amber).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-31  
10. Reinstall the rear access cover.  
11. Check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:  
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the  
order to start the Device Manager.  
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.  
(3) Click the [General] tab to display the property to confirm that the device is working properly.  
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-32  
Hot Remove  
Use the following procedure to execute Hot Remove:  
1. Stop the device driver used by the Hot-plug PCI board you want to remove as follows:  
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot  
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the  
system to fail.  
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:  
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.  
(2) Click [Next].  
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-33  
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].  
(5) Select the target device, then click [Next].  
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] closes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-34  
(7) Click [Finish].  
(9) Remove the rear access cover and locate the slot from which the board has to be removed.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.  
To stop the device driver using the PCI hot-plug switch:  
(1) Remove the rear access cover and confirm the slot to remove the PCI board.  
(2) Press the PCI hot-plug switch on the slot from which the PCI board is to be removed.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.  
2. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.  
3. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could  
damage the tab.  
Lock (for long card)  
Tab  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-35  
4. Install a slot cover on the slot from which you removed the PCI board, then slowly close the tab.  
IMPORTANT: To maintain the dust-proofing and electromagnetic radiation  
characteristics and cooling performance of the server, be sure to install the blank plate on  
the slot from which you removed the PCI board.  
5. Reinstall the rear access cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-36  
Hot Replace  
Use the following procedure to execute a Hot Replace:  
1. Stop the device driver used by the Hot Plug PCI board you want to replace as follows:  
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot  
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the  
system to fail.  
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:  
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.  
(2) Click [Next].  
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-37  
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].  
(5) Select the target device, then click [Next].  
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].  
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] terminates.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-38  
(7) Click [Finish].  
(8) Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed.  
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.  
2. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.  
3. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.  
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could  
damage the tab.  
Lock (for long card)  
Tab  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-39  
4. Slowly insert the PCI board into the server.  
5. Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.  
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to  
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause  
damage to the PCI board.  
NOTES:  
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.  
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots.  
They are for protecting the PCI boards already installed. Take care not to remove or  
damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken  
off, reinstall the insulator in place.  
6. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.  
7. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.  
8. Press the PCI hot plug switch.  
The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once, and then goes on.  
NOTES:  
„
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the operating system  
automatically recognises the installed PCI board and installs the driver.  
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on  
(amber).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-40  
9. Reinstall the PCI slot cover.  
10. Check if the installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:  
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the  
order to start the Device Manager.  
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.  
(3) Display the [General] dialog in the property to confirm that the device is working properly.  
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-41  
„ Notes when removing the PCI slot insulators  
Be careful that the insulator does not make contact with the capacitor of the PCI-Express slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-42  
Memory Board  
To install or remove a DIMM, remove the memory board first.  
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (32 GB maximum) can be installed in  
the server.  
The failing DIMM or memory board can be hot-swapped (replacement with power-on state) in the memory RAID  
configuration. For hot-swap memory board, see "Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)" and "Memory Hot-Plug  
Feature 2 (Hot Add)" described later in this chapter.  
Memory board slot #3  
(for additional memory  
board)  
Memory board slot #4  
(for additional memory  
board)  
Memory board slot #2  
(for additional memory  
board)  
Memory board slot #1  
(for factory-installed  
memory board)  
Memory board installation order: #2 → #3 → #4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-43  
Removal  
Remove the memory board as follows:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The memory board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the  
metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling  
the memory board. Do not touch the memory board terminals or on-board parts by a  
bare hand or place the memory board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the  
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
„
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board,  
turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the two screws, and remove the memory slot cover from the front of the server.  
4. Unlock the memory board to open the ejector.  
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board, turn off the power and  
wait for several minutes before pulling it out.  
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes off). Wait several  
minutes in this state.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-44  
5. Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.  
6. Put the memory board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.  
Installation  
Install the memory board in reverse order of the removal steps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-45  
DIMM  
Install an additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) in a DIMM socket on the memory board in the server.  
DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.  
NOTE: Up to 8 GB of memory (2 GB DIMM × 4) can be installed.  
DIMM slot 4  
DIMM slot 3  
DIMM slot 2  
DIMM slot 1  
*
DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:  
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row  
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and  
single rank  
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11  
S
Single rank  
Column address  
Row address  
Capacity  
Buffered / Registered  
Frequency  
IMPORTANT: The last digit character indicates the symbol representing either of single  
rank (S) or dual rank (D).  
If DIMMs of single rank and dual rank are installed on the same memory board, be sure to  
install the DIMM of dual rank in DIMM Group #1 (DIMM slots 1 and 2). Otherwise, the  
system will fail to start.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-46  
Installation  
Install a DIMM as follows:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal  
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the  
DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the  
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"  
described earlier.  
„
„
*
Make sure to use a DIMM authorised by us. Installing a third-party DIMM may cause a  
failure of the DIMM as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage  
resulting from installing such a board will be charged.  
Install two additional DIMMs for each group because the server uses interleaved  
memory. If DIMMs of different specifications* are installed in a group, the server does  
not operate normally.  
DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:  
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row  
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and  
single rank  
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11  
S
Single rank  
Column address  
Row address  
Capacity  
Buffered / Registered  
Frequency  
„
A dummy tray is installed in the additional memory board slot. If you remove the  
dummy tray, keep it for future use.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the memory slot cover, and remove the memory board on which the DIMMs are to be installed.  
See "Memory Board" described earlier in this chapter.  
NOTE: To additionally install a memory board, remove one screw to remove the blank  
cover from the additional slot.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.  
4. Locate the DIMM sockets in which you are going to install DIMMs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-47  
5. Fully open the levers at both ends of the socket (1) and remove the socket cover.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
To avoid damaging the lever, do not apply an excess force to the lever.  
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.  
6. Push the DIMM straight into the socket (2).  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of DIMM. The terminal side of the DIMM has a  
cut-out to prevent incorrect insertion.  
The levers automatically close when the DIMM is inserted into the socket (3).  
IMPORTANT: Always install the DIMMs in pair. Two DIMMs must be of the same  
specification. DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:  
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row  
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and  
single rank  
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11  
S
Single rank  
Column address  
Row address  
Capacity  
Buffered / Registered  
Frequency  
7. Install the memory board back into the chassis slot.  
8. Install the memory slot cover.  
9. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in  
Chapter 8.  
10. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify that the installed DIMM shows  
the status "Normal". (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
11. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.  
12. If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is in use, set the paging file size to the recommended value (total  
memory size * 1.5) or a greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-48  
Removal  
Remove a DIMM as follows:  
IMPORTANT: The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch  
the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling  
the DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the  
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"  
described earlier.  
NOTE: To remove the failed DIMM, check the error message appearing in POST or  
ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in which the failed DIMM is installed.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the memory slot cover, and then remove the memory board on which the DIMMs to be removed are  
installed.  
NOTE: The error lamp corresponding to the failing DIMM goes on.  
4. Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM.(1).  
The DIMM is unlocked and ready for removal.(2)  
5. Install the memory board.  
6. Install the memory slot cover.  
7. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in  
Chapter 8.  
8. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory Retest] → [Enabled] to  
clear the error information of the removed DIMM. Then, Then, select [Server] → [Clear FRU LED] → [Yes]  
to turn off the LED indicating DIMM error. (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
9. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-49  
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature  
Memory Mirroring Feature  
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board  
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this  
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations  
are:  
„ Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2  
„ Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4  
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacities.  
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.  
Memory board 1  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 2  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 3  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
–
Memory board 4  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
–
A
B
C
Memory RAID Feature  
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other  
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board  
must have DIMMs of same capacities.  
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.  
Memory board 1  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 2  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 3  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
Memory board 4  
2GB (1GB*2)  
8GB (2GB*4)  
4GB (1GB*4)  
A
B
C
Setting BIOS  
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] and set as follows:  
„ To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].  
„ To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-50  
Others  
„ Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –  
capacity for standby memory  
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity  
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity  
„ Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.  
„ Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:  
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:  
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.  
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.  
c) If ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event Viewer:  
Source name:  
Event ID:  
ESMCommonService  
2313  
Explanation:  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time: XX  
d) If report setting is made through ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is performed.  
The report contents are as follows:  
Explanation:  
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.  
Memory number: XX  
Date/time:  
XX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-51  
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)  
In the memory redundant configuration such as memory mirroring and memory RAID configuration, the memory board  
can be removed while the operating system is running.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the two screws and then remove the memory slot cover.  
4. Press the Attention switch corresponding to the memory board to be removed.  
The memory board power lamp and the memory board redundancy lamp for that board go off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-52  
5. Make sure that the memory board power lamp goes off, then remove the memory board.  
IMPORTANT: The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When  
removing the board, turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.  
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes  
off). Wait several minutes in this state.  
6. Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-53  
7. To set back the memory boards in redundant configuration, install the memory boards in reverse order of  
removal procedure. Then, press the Attention switch on the memory board. The memory board Power lamp  
starts flashing, and after a while, it goes on. The Memory Board Redundancy lamp goes on.  
This completes Hot Replace of memory board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-54  
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 2 (Hot Add)  
In Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition, you can use the Hot-Add memory feature. The Hot Add feature allows you  
to add a physical memory without shutting down the system.  
To use the Hot-Add memory feature, set the BIOS as follows:  
Setting BIOS  
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:  
„ To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode: Select [Normal].  
„ To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode: Select [Mirror].  
NOTE: Before selecting [Mirror], the mirroring configuration must have been set for  
memory boards 1 and 2. In this case, the memory hot plug is used for memory boards 3 and  
4. (Memory boards 3 and 4 must also be in mirroring configuration.)  
In addition, be sure to specify [Advanced] → [ Memory Configuration] → [Hot-add  
Memory Support] to "Enabled".  
„ Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode  
When the operating system starts with memory board 1 (factory-installed), installing memory boards on  
which DIMMs are installed to memory board slots 2, 3, and 4 can increase the physical memory capacity. See  
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.  
For example, if you insert a memory board into memory board slot 2 and press the Attention switch of that  
slot, the memory board Power lamp starts flashing and initialisation of memory is started.  
When the memory board Power lamp stops flashing and goes on, the operating system is notified that the  
memory has been added.  
The notification is processed on the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory  
in performance monitor of task manager. Memory boards can be added to slots 3 and 4 in a similar procedure.  
„ Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode  
Add the memory boards 3 and 4 while the memory boards 1 and 2 are configured to use the mirroring feature.  
In this case, memory boards 3 and 4 must be configured to use the mirroring feature. See Memory Hot-Plug  
Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.  
the only difference with normal mode is that the memory board is added to slot 3, and there is no change in  
system status. Adding a memory board to memory board slot 4 can make the memory mirroring configuration.  
And it is notified to the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory in  
performance monitor of task manager.  
You can confirm that a half of installed physical memory capacity is added. In memory mirroring  
configuration, the memory board additionally installed by using the Hot-Add memory feature can be  
hot-replaceable.  
„ Indication on ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add Memory  
If you add a memory board dynamically by using Hot-Add feature, the added memory size will not be  
indicated on Data Viewer of ESMPRO Manager unless the system is rebooted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-55  
Processor Board  
To install or remove a processor, remove the processor board.  
Removal  
Remove the processor board as follows:  
IMPORTANT: The processor board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure  
to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before  
handling the processor board. Do not touch the processor board terminals or on-board parts  
by a bare hand or place the processor board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the  
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the memory board cover.  
4. Remove the two screws and then remove the processor board cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-56  
5. Remove the two screws securing the ejectors.  
6. Unlock the processor board and open the ejectors.  
7. Firmly hold the processor board and pull it out from the chassis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-57  
NOTE: Notes when removing the processor board  
The processor board is very heavy (max. 7 kg). Pay attention not to drop it.  
8. Put the processor board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.  
Installation  
Install the processor board in reverse order of the removal steps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-58  
Processor  
The processor board is equipped with sockets to install four 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ processors MP and corresponding  
VRMs. (One processor and one VRM are factory-installed.)  
Processor VRM #1  
Processor VRM #3  
Processor VRM #2  
Processor VRM #4  
Processor #3  
Processor #1  
Processor #4  
Processor #2  
NOTE: If different revisions of processors are installed in a multiprocessor system,  
Windows 2000 logs the following information every start-up. If this message is logged, it is  
no problem for operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-59  
Installation  
Install a processor as follows:  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The processor is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal  
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the  
processor. Do not touch the processor pins by a bare hand or place the processor directly  
on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
„
When using the server in the single processor configuration, processor must be installed  
on Processor #1 socket.  
„
„
Install the processor in the ascending order of the processor number (see figure above).  
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install a dummy cover to the empty slot.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.  
3. Remove the memory slot cover.  
4. Remove the processor slot cover.  
5. Remove the processor board.  
6. Locate the processor socket in which you are going to install the processor, remove four screws, then remove  
the dummy cover from the socket.  
7. Remove the protective cover from the socket surface.  
8. Raise the locking lever on the socket.  
IMPORTANT: Open the lever until it stops. It can be opened to approximately 120  
degrees.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-60  
9. Put the processor on the socket slowly and gently.  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the processor. Pin layouts on two corners among  
four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion. Confirm the pin mark and pin  
layout on the socket, and insert the processor correctly.  
Pin mark  
10. Push the processor lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the processor.  
11. Remove the cooling sheet from the bottom of the heat sink, and put the heat sink on processor.  
NOTE: You do not need to care of the direction of heat sink.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-61  
12. Tighten the four screws to secure the heat sink.  
13. Make sure that the heat sink is level.  
IMPORTANT: If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and check if the processor is  
positioned correctly.  
14. Fully open the levers on both sides of the VRM socket.  
15. Push the VRM straight into the socket.  
When the VRM is inserted into the socket, the lever automatically closes. Push the lever toward inside to  
securely close the lever.  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the VRM. The terminal side of VRM has a cut-out  
to prevent the incorrect insertion.  
16. Install the components you removed previously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-62  
17. Start SETUP and select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.  
18. To add one or more processors to the server in 1-processor configuration to operate the server with more than  
one processor, do the procedure below:  
For Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, change the driver of [Computer] in the device manager to  
[ACPI multi-processor PC] and then update the system (see Chapter 5).  
Removal  
To remove the processor, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 to 5 of the installation procedure and do the reverse  
procedure of steps 8 to 12.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Do not remove any processor unless it is failed.  
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, a dummy cover is installed in the empty slot.  
Be sure to install a dummy cover on the slot where the processor is not installed.  
„
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to  
the processor. To remove the heat sink from the processor, first turn the heat sink to the  
left and right lightly to make sure that the heat sink can be set apart from the processor.  
Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the processor may cause the processor  
and/or socket to be damaged.  
Do as follows if a processor is removed (or replaced):  
1. Start SETUP, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" – "Processor Retest" in order to clear the error  
information on the removed processor (see Chapter 4).  
When a processor is replaced, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" to confirm that the ID and L2 and  
L3 Cache of the additional processor are defined correctly (see Chapter 4).  
2. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
Item  
Express5800/140He  
Model type at shipment  
Type  
Diskless  
64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP  
3.16 GHz/1 MB  
3.66 GHz/1 MB  
3.33 GHz/8 MB (on  
specific configurations  
only)  
Clock/2nd cache  
Processor  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
1
4
Chipset  
Intel TwinCastle + ICH5 + Dobson + PXH  
2 GB (1 GB×2)  
Standard  
Maximum  
32 GB (The standard DIMMs must be replaced.)  
2 DIMMs  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Maximum 8 times (2 times per each memory board)  
DDR2 400 SDRAM DIMM (Registered)  
ECC  
Memory  
Memory module  
Error check  
Memory mirroring feature  
Online sparing memory feature  
Memory Hot-add/Hot-replace feature  
Memory RAID feature  
Supported  
Graphics (VRAM)  
ATI® Radeon® 7000M (VRAM 16MB)  
Floppy disk (standard)  
–
–
Auxiliary  
input  
device  
Hard disk (standard)  
Hard disk (maximum)  
CD-ROM (standard)  
1500 GB (300 GB × 5) + 2400 GB (300 GB x 8, Additional HDD cage  
is required)  
ATAPI Interface × 1 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)  
2 slots (Full height x1)  
5.25-inch device bay  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Up to 13 slots (Hot-swappable, Additional HDD cage is required)  
4 slots (Hot-swappable)  
PCI-X 100MHz (64-bit)  
Additional  
slot  
PCI 33MHz (32-bit)  
PCI EXPRESS(x8)  
PCI EXPRESS(x4)  
2 slots  
2 slots (Hot-swappable)  
1 slot  
LAN interface  
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 port)  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (1 port, dedicated for server management)  
LAN interface (A-RMC)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
Item  
Express5800/140He  
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
USB  
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)  
4-pin (3 ports; front: 1 (USB1.1), rear: 2 (USB2.0))  
External  
interface  
D-sub 9-pin (2 ports, rear), RJ-45 (1 port, front (exclusively used with  
either port on the rear panel))  
Serial  
Parallel  
Network  
Display  
SCSI  
D-sub 25-pin (1 port)  
RJ-45 (2 ports and 1 management port)  
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)  
–
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
Middle-Tower  
310 (width) × 456 (height) × 805 (depth) mm  
75 kg (Max.)  
Power supply  
100 to 127 Vac ±10%, 200 to 240 Vac ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1Hz  
Power consumption  
1800 VA  
Temperature  
Humidity  
10 to 35°C  
Environmental  
requirements  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Others  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in the  
standard configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Other Precautions  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller  
The LAN controller on the IO board has two ports. Each port supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T  
networks and a capable of full or half duplex.  
The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB.  
However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value the same as the value specified for  
the HUB.  
Server Management Software  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility.  
We recommend that you should install NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the  
server.  
Floppy Disk  
The following describes use of the floppy disk.  
Floppy disk type  
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:  
„ 2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)  
Stores data of 1.44 MB.  
„ 2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)  
Stores data of 720 KB.  
Shutter  
Catching hole  
Insertion direction  
indicator  
Head window  
Centering hub  
Label  
Centering hole  
High-density media hole  
(2HD only)  
Write protection  
hole  
Write protection switch  
Front  
Rear  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2  
Notes on use  
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep the following notes in  
mind to use it:  
„ Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.  
„ Attach the label to the correct position.  
„ Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
„ Do not open the shutter.  
„ Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
„ Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a  
heater).  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.  
„ Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be  
accidentally sprayed over them.  
„ Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.  
„ Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.  
„ Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.  
„ Write-protection  
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure.  
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format  
it. We recommend that you should write-protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about  
to save data.  
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.  
„ Disk format  
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to initialise the floppy  
disk and make it available for the system environment (operating system).  
IMPORTANT:  
„
„
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if any.  
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server.  
Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line.  
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes with your operating  
system for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
„ Data backup  
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk, digital audio tape, or  
magnet-optical disk).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk, if provided.  
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as operator's misconduct or  
sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we recommend that you should make a back-up  
copy of your valuable data on a regular basis.  
CD-ROM  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:  
„ Press the centre of the storage case to remove the CD-ROM from the case.  
„ Do not drop the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.  
„ Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.  
„ Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.  
„ Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
„ Do not leave the CD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.  
„ Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a  
heater).  
„ When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its centre to edge with a dry  
soft cloth slowly and gently.  
„ Use CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner.  
„ Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.  
Tape Media  
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the server.  
„ Saving your valuable data  
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save them into two  
cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.  
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as well as to protect  
your valuable data and programs from loss.  
„ Three-generation data management  
We recommend that you should employ three-generation data management for data storage.  
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save data to tape A on the first  
day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on the forth day, and so on. That is, you save  
data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C.  
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error. Also when  
both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4  
Keyboard  
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.  
IMPORTANT:  
„
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard. Doing so may  
cause a failure of the keyboard.  
„
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle. Adjust  
the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in  
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.  
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the manual that comes  
with the software for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
Mouse  
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many operating systems and application software  
require the mouse for operation.  
NOTE:  
„
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software. For details,  
refer to the manual provided with the software.  
„
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs  
smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse. When your mouse movement  
seems dull, clean your mouse. (See Chapter 7.)  
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."  
Click:  
Press the button only once and release it.  
Double-click:  
Drag:  
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.  
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.  
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard.  
Click  
Pressing  
Click  
Click  
Click  
Double-click  
Drag  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6  
This page is intentionally left blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
IRQ and I/O Port Address  
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an appropriate one to install an optional  
device.  
Interrupt Request  
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:  
IRQ  
0
Peripheral Device (Controller)  
System timer  
IRQ  
8
Peripheral Device (Controller)  
Real-time clock  
1
Keyboard  
9
PCI/SCI  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cascaded connection  
COM B serial port (PCI)  
COM A serial port (PCI)  
PCI/LPT2 parallel port  
Floppy disk  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
PCI  
BMCIRQ/PCI  
Mouse  
Numeric processor  
Primary IDE (CD-ROM drive)  
PCI  
LPT1 parallel port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2  
PIRQ and PCI Device  
The factory-set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows. You can change these interrupts by using the BIOS  
SETUP, however, use the factory-set interrupts as they are. See Chapter 4 for details.  
PIRQ1  
PIRQ2  
PIRQ3  
PIRQ4  
PIRQ5  
PIRQ8  
USB#1  
√
USB#2  
√
USB20  
√
IDE (native mode)  
SMBus  
√
√
VGA  
INTA  
RAID  
LAN  
INTA  
INTA  
INTB  
INTB  
PCISlot#1 (PCI)  
INTC  
INTD  
INTC  
INTD  
INTB  
INTA  
PCISlot#2 (PCI)  
INTA  
PCI Slot#3(PCI-EXPRESS)  
PCI Slot#4 (PCI-EXPRESS)  
PCI Slot#5 (PCI-EXPRESS)  
PCI Slot#6 (PCI-X)  
INTA  
INTA  
INTA  
INTB  
INTD  
INTB  
INTB  
INTB  
INTC  
INTC  
INTC  
INTA  
INTC  
INTD  
INTD  
INTD  
PCI Slot#7 (PCI-X)  
PCI Slot#8 (PCI-X)  
PCI Slot#9 (PCI-X)  
INTB  
INTD  
INTA  
INTC  
INTA  
INTC  
INTB  
INTD  
INTA  
INTC  
INTB  
INTD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
I/O Port Address  
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:  
Addresses  
00-08h  
09-0Eh  
0Fh  
Description  
DMA Control Registers  
RESERVED  
DMA Control Register  
Chip  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
10-18h  
19-1Eh  
1Fh  
DMA Control Register  
RESERVED  
DMA Control Register  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
20-21h  
24-25h  
28-29h  
2C-2Dh  
2E-2Fh  
30-31h  
34-35h  
38-39h  
3C-3Dh  
40-42h  
43h  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Configuration Registers  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
Master 8259 Programming Interface  
8254 Programming Interface  
RESERVED  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
PC87417  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
4E-4Fh  
50-52h  
53h  
Configuration Registers  
8254 Programming Interface  
RESERVED  
PC87417  
ICH5  
ICH5  
60h  
61h  
Keyboard/Mouse  
NMI Status Register  
PC87417  
ICH5  
62h  
63h  
64h  
65h  
PC87417  
ICH5  
PC87417  
ICH5  
NMI Status Register  
Keyboard/Mouse  
NMI Status Register  
66h  
67h  
PC87417  
ICH5  
NMI Status Register  
70h  
RESERVED  
ICH5  
71h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
72h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
73h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
74h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
75h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
76h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
77h  
RTC (data)  
ICH5  
80-91h  
92h  
16-bit DMA Control Registers  
Port 92 Register  
ICH5  
ICH5  
93-9Fh  
A0-A1h  
A4-A5h  
A8-A9h  
AC-ADh  
B0-B1h  
B2-B3h  
B4-B5h  
B8-B9h  
BC-BDh  
C0-D1h  
C2-DDh  
DE-DFh  
F0h  
DMA Control Register  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Power Management  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
Slave 8259 Programming Interface  
DMA Controller Page Registers  
RESERVED  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
DMA Controller Page Registers  
Reset IRQ13  
102h  
170h-177h  
VGA  
Radeon7000M  
ICH5  
Secondary IDE Command Block Registers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
Addresses  
1F0h-1F7h  
278-27Fh  
2F8-2FFh  
376h  
370-377h  
378-37Fh  
3B0-3BBh  
3BC-3BEh  
3C0-3CFh  
3D4-3D5h  
3F6h  
3F0-3F7h  
3F8-3FFh  
40Bh  
4D0h  
4D1h  
Description  
Primary IDE Command Block Registers  
(Parallel Port 3)  
Chip  
ICH5  
PC87417  
PC87417  
ICH5  
PC87417  
PC87417  
Radeon7000M  
PC87417  
Radeon7000M  
Radeon7000M  
ICH5  
PC87417  
PC87417  
ICH5  
ICH5  
ICH5  
Serial port 2  
Secondary IDE Control Block Registers  
(Floppy disk 2), IDE 2  
(Parallel Port 2)  
VGA  
Parallel port 1  
VGA  
VGA  
Primary IDE Control Block registers  
Floppy disk 1,IDE 1  
Serial port 1  
DMA1 Extended Write Mode Register  
Master 8259 ELCR Programming  
Slave 8259 ELCR Programming  
Turbo and Reset Control  
CF9h  
TwinCastle  
*1 Hexadecimal notation  
*2 The I/O port address of a PCI device is set according to its type and number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions  
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition without using Express Setup tool.  
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 X64 EDITIONS  
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition  
Installation.  
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:  
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for  
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing  
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.  
„ Supporting installation of the operating system in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)  
– SecuRAID321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)  
„ Other optional boards  
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller  
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1 Disk Controller  
Updating System  
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control Menu.  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note  
the following issue:  
„ Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the  
operating system newly.  
„ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of the operating system partition.  
MO Device  
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be  
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2  
Media such as DAT  
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the  
system, such as DAT.  
Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system= 4100 MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5  
Dump file Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size + 1 MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information  
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in  
the boot drive is required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory  
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for  
the entire system.  
„
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is '2048 MB +  
1 MB'.  
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install  
these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as  
follows:  
4100 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 1 MB) + Application Size  
= 5381 MB + Application Size  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it  
cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a  
separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after installing the  
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-3  
INSTALLING Windows Server™ 2003 X64 EDITIONS  
Preparations for Installation  
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
„ Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM)  
„ User's Guide  
„ Getting Started  
„ Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Edition, you do not need to create it again.  
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two  
procedures:  
„ Create from the menu which appears when running Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Express5800 Server, you can use the other  
procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below:  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then  
on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support  
Disk] menu.  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.  
„ Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions  
– Windows Server™ 2003  
– Windows® XP x64 Edition  
– Windows® XP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
– Windows® 2000  
– Windows® Me/98/95  
– Windows NT® 4.0  
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master  
Control Menu], if you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.  
Follow the steps below:  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003 x64].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a Right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-5  
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press  
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Begin after turning on the system power again.  
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk  
drive, and press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
7. Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– MegaRAID PCI Express(TM) ROMB (When on-board RAID is installed.)  
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
For details, refer to "Getting Started".  
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and Advanced Settings"  
and "Updating the System" of this manual.  
Procedure for License Authentication  
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the  
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.  
NOTES:  
„
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.  
COA label may be attached to your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6  
Updating the System  
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.  
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the  
Administrators group.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.  
3. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Express5800 system] section.  
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.  
5. Click [Restart Computer] to restart the system.  
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately after clicking on  
[Restart Computer]  
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing  
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the  
system update again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-7  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document  
attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and  
enhances throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to use these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet:  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory:  
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS1\PROSET\WS03_32E  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - Install Shield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Install].  
7. When [Install Shield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
8. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-8  
Network Driver  
Specifying the details of network driver.  
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode need  
to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
1. Click Start, [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and click[Local Area Connection].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.  
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. Open the [Device Manager]  
2. Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
3. Click [Link] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [OK].  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network  
and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network  
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network  
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For  
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described  
later in this chapter.  
Optional Network Board Driver  
If you want to use optional Network Board (INTEL PRO/1000 F 64-BIT PCI / INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT PCI / 11B  
PCI-X PRO/1000 MT DUAL), the network driver will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the  
Network board should not be used.  
Re-install the Network Driver  
The network driver will be installed automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-9  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
The standard graphics accelerator driver installed by "Update Express5800 system" is automatically installed.  
The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install it manually.  
If you want to use an optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install  
the driver.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.  
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\setup.exe.  
4. Follow the message to continue the installation.  
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.  
5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions  
and restart the system.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29320 / SCSI U160  
PCI-ATX-64b)  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)  
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and  
install the driver as follows:  
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].  
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box is displayed, select [Search for a suitable driver for  
my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].  
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box is displayed, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server  
2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].  
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].  
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box is  
displayed. Click [Complete].  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP  
(DEBUG INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-10  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Installing Windows Server™ 2003  
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup tool.  
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server™ 2003  
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server™ 2003 Installation.  
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:  
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for  
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing  
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.  
„ Supporting installation of the operating system in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)  
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)  
„ Other optional boards  
– Initio 101 SCSI Controller  
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller  
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b Disk Controller  
Updating System  
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control Menu.  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note  
the following issue:  
„ Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the  
operating system newly.  
„ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.  
MO Device  
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be  
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
Media such as DAT  
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the  
system, such as DAT.  
Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 2900 MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5  
Dump File Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information  
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in  
the boot drive is required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory  
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for  
the entire system.  
„
„
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the  
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.  
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is  
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.  
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install  
these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as  
follows:  
2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4192 MB + Application Size  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it  
cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a  
separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after installing the  
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-3  
INSTALLING Windows Server 2003  
Preparations for Installation  
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
„ Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM) or Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003  
Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)  
„ User's Guide  
„ Getting Started  
„ Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows  
Server 2003, you do not need to create it again.  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures:  
„ Create from the menu which appears when running Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Express5800 Server, you can use the other  
procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below:  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then  
on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support Disk] menu.  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.  
„ Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions  
– Windows Server™ 2003  
– Windows® XP x64 Edition  
– Windows® XP  
– Windows® 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4  
– Windows® Me/98/95  
– Windows NT® 4.0  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master Control  
Menu], if you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.  
Follow the steps below:  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-5  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows Server™ 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press  
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will be displayed.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Restart after turning on the system power again.  
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive, and  
press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)] and press Enter.  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that are displayed.  
For details, refer to "Getting Started".  
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and Advanced Settings"  
and "Updating the System" of this manual.  
Procedure for License Authentication  
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the  
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.  
NOTES:  
„
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.  
COA label may be attached to your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-6  
Updating the System  
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.  
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the  
Administrators group.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.  
3. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Express5800 system] section.  
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.  
5. Click [Restart Computer] to restart the system.  
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately after clicking  
[Restart Computer]  
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing  
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the  
system update again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-7  
Upgrade Installation  
NOTE: If you are using the Adaptec 29160, please carry out after removing it.  
1. Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003.  
2. Power on the system and start Windows 2000.  
3. Log on as an administrator.  
4. Insert the Windows Server™ 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
Then, [Select an operation] dialog will be displayed.  
NOTE: If the [Select an operation] dialog box is not displayed, start \SETUP.EXE from  
CD-ROM drive.  
5. Select [Install Windows Server 2003].  
Then, a dialog box asks to select upgrade or clear installation.  
6. Select "Upgrade (recommended)" and click Next.  
Follow the messages and continue. The system will automatically restart after copying the files.  
NOTE: You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
7. If a disk array controller is attached to the device, press F6 while a message, "Setup is inspecting your  
computer's hardware configuration...", is on the screen.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.  
8. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
9. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive, and  
press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)] and press Enter.  
10. Update the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-8  
11. Install the driver and make detailed settings.  
„ If PROSet is already installed, uninstall PROSet before upgrading.  
If the teaming function is enabled, disable this function before uninstalling PROSet.  
„ During upgrade installation, [Disk Insert] dialog box may be displayed.  
If it is displayed, insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy  
disk drive, and click [OK].  
[Files Needed] dialog box may be displayed.  
Enter "a:\" into "Copy files from:" and then click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-9  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document  
attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
„ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
„ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
„ Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and  
enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to use these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory:  
<CD-ROM DriveLetter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC5\PROSET\WS03XP32  
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-10  
Network Driver  
Specifying the details of network driver.  
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode  
need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
1. Click Start, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click [Local Area Connection].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.  
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* Procedure with the standard start menu  
Click Start, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].  
* Procedure with the classic start menu  
1. Click Start, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.  
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.  
3. Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.  
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Specify the other network driver the same as above.  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be displayed from [Network  
and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you add "Network Monitor" at "Adding Services".  
"Network Monitor" can monitor frames (or packets) sent or received by a computer on  
which "Network Monitor" is installed. This is an effective tool for analyzing network faults.  
For information about the installation procedure, see Chapter 6.  
Re-install the Network Driver  
The network driver will be installed automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-11  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)  
If you use SCSI controller driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320), install it according to the following procedure:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer  
Management].  
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver that Device Manager lists as unknown device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" is displayed, select "Install from a list or specific location  
[Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, enter  
"a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller] (When Initio 101 board is installed.)  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI] (When Adaptec 29320 board is installed.)  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message displayed on the screen.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b)  
If you use SCSI controller driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b), update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM attached to your system.  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)  
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and  
install the driver as follows:  
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].  
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box is displayed, select [Search for a suitable driver for  
my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].  
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box is displayed, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server  
2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].  
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].  
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box  
below is displayed. Click [Complete].  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP  
(DEBUG INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-12  
This page is left intentionally blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Product Configuration Record Table  
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.  
Hardware  
Main Unit  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Processor  
#1  
Clock  
Clock  
Clock  
Clock  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
#2  
#3  
#4  
Memory  
Group #1  
Group #2  
Group #3  
Group #4  
Group #5  
Group #6  
Group #7  
Group #8  
Monitor  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Type  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Hard Disk Drive (Standard)  
ID0  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID4  
Type  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2  
Hard Disk Drive (Option)  
ID0  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID8  
ID9  
ID10  
ID11  
Type  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Backup Device  
Slot 1  
Size  
Capacity  
Serial No.  
Model name  
Size  
Type number  
Capacity  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Slot 2  
Model name  
Type number  
Date Installed  
PCI Slot #1  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
PCI Slot #2  
PCI Slot #3  
PCI Slot #4  
PCI Slot #5  
PCI Slot #6  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
PCI Slot #7  
PCI Slot #8  
PCI Slot #9  
Printer  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Additional Cabinet for Disk  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 1  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
External Peripheral Device 2  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Display  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4  
Software  
Firmware version  
Operating System  
Application of RUR media  
File system  
Name:  
Name:  
† HPFS  
Version:  
Version:  
† Apply  
† FAT  
† NTFS  
† Others (  
)
Bundled software installed  
Licensed software installed  
Application running when a failure occurred  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Impact Driver 9078 20 User Manual
MTD Blower 247 655A000 User Manual
Multiquip Microscope Magnifier MVC 90L User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router DGND4000 100NAS User Manual
Nilfisk Advance America Lawn Sweeper 56316025 R32 C User Manual
NordicTrack Home Gym NTL109050 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo System T 4355 User Manual
Panasonic Car Video System CQ VA707N User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera DMC FX1GN User Manual
Panasonic VCR AJ HD150FE User Manual